Crown Audio Speaker CTs 1200 User Manual

CTs 2-Channel Series

CTs 600

CTs 1200

CTs 2000

CTs 3000

Operation Manual

Obtaining Other Language Versions: To obtain information in another language about the use of this product, please contact your

local Crown Distributor. If you need assistance locating your local distributor, please contact Crown at 574-294-8000.

This manual does not include all of the details of design, production, or variations of the equipment. Nor does it cover every possible

situation which may arise during installation, operation or maintenance.

The information provided in this manual was deemed accurate as of the publication date. However, updates to this information may have

occurred. To obtain the latest version of this manual, please visit the Crown website at www.crownaudio.com.

Trademark Notice: Com-Tech, Crown, Amcron and Multi-Mode are registered trademarks of Crown International. PIP and PIP2 are

trademarks of Crown International. Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Some models may be exported under the name Amcron.^®

134433-4

7/03

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

Crown International, Inc.

DECLARATION of CONFORMITY

Sue Whitfield

ISSUED BY: Crown International, Inc.

1718 W. Mishawaka Road

574-294-8289

[email protected]

Elkhart, Indiana 46517 U.S.A.

European Representative's Name and Address:

Nick Owen

19 Clos Nant Coslech

Pontprennau

Cardiff

CF23 8ND United Kingdom

Equipment Type: Commercial Audio Power Amplifiers

Family Name: CTs

Model Names: CTs 3000, CTs 2000, CTs 1200, CTs 600

EMC Standards:

EN 55103-1:1995 Electromagnetic Compatibility - Product Family Standard for Audio, Video, Audio-Visual and Entertainment Lighting Control Apparatus for Professional Use, Part 1: Emissions

EN 55103-1:1995 Magnetic Field Emissions-Annex A @ 10 cm and 1 M

EN 61000-3-2:1995+A14:2000 Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (equipment input current ≤16A per phase)

EN 61000-3-3:1995 Limitation of Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker in Low-Voltage Supply Systems Rated Current ≤16A

EN 55022:1992 + A1: 1995 & A2:1997 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of ITE: Radiated, Class B Limits; Conducted, Class B

EN 55103-2:1996 Electromagnetic Compatibility - Product Family Standard for Audio, Video, Audio-Visual and Entertainment Lighting Control Apparatus for Professional Use, Part 2: Immunity

EN 61000-4-2:1995 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity (Environment E2-Criteria B, 4k V Contact, 8k V Air Discharge)

EN 61000-4-3:1996 Radiated, Radio-Frequency, Electromagnetic Immunity (Environment E2, criteria A)

EN 61000-4-4:1995 Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity (Criteria B)

EN 61000-4-5:1995 Surge Immunity (Criteria B)

EN 61000-4-6:1996 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio-Frequency Fields (Criteria A)

EN 61000-4-11:1994 Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions and Voltage Variation

Safety Standard:

EN 60065: 1998 Safety Requirements - Audio Video and Similar Electronic Apparatus

I certify that the product identified above conforms to the requirements of the EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC as amended by 92/31/EEC, and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EES as amended by 93/68/EEC.

Signed

Larry Coburn

Date of Issue: March 1, 2002

Title: Senior Vice President of Manufacturing

Operation Manual

page 3

Due to line current harmonics, we recommend that you contact your supply authority before connection.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

Table of Contents

5.1.3 Fault ..........................................................................15

Important Safety Instructions .......................................................... 2

Declaration of Conformity .............................................................. 3

1 Welcome ...................................................... 5

1.1 Features ............................................................................. 5

2 How to Use This Manual .................................... 6

3 Setup ........................................................... 7

3.1 Unpack Your Amplifier ....................................................... 7

3.2 Install Your Amplifier ......................................................... 7

3.3 Ensure Proper Cooling ....................................................... 7

3.4 Choose Input Wire and Connectors .................................... 8

3.5 Choose Output Wire and Connectors ................................. 8

3.6 Wire Your System .............................................................. 9

3.6.1 Dual 8/4/2 Mode ....................................................... 9

3.6.2 Bridge-Mono 16/8/4 Mode........................................ 9

3.6.3 Dual 70V/100V Mode ................................................ 10

3.6.4 Bridge-Mono 140V/200V Mode ................................ 10

3.6.5 Dual Mode with “Y” Input .......................................... 11

3.7 Connect to AC Mains ......................................................... 12

3.8 Startup Procedure .............................................................. 12

4 Operation ...................................................... 12

4.1 Precautions ........................................................................ 12

4.2 Front Panel Controls and Indicators ................................... 13

4.3 Back Panel Controls and Connectors ................................. 14

5 Advanced Features and Options ...........................15

5.1 Protection Systems ............................................................15

5.1.1 Thermal Level Control (TLC) .....................................15

5.1.2 Junction Temperature Simulation (JTS) .....................15

5.1.4 High-Pass Filters ......................................................15

5.1.5 Low-Pass Filters .......................................................15

5.1.6 AC Under/Over Voltage Protection ............................15

5.1.7 Circuit Breaker ..........................................................15

5.1.8 DC Output Servo .......................................................15

5.1.9 Inrush Limiting ..........................................................15

5.1.10 Variable-speed Fans ................................................15

5.2 Advanced Features .............................................................15

5.2.1 Switching Power Supply ...........................................15

5.2.2 Input Compressor .....................................................15

5.2.3 Sleep Circuit ..............................................................15

5.2.4 Input Sensitivity Switches .........................................16

5.3 Options ..............................................................................16

5.3.1 Nominal Attenuation Settings ....................................17

6 Troubleshooting...............................................18

7 Specifications .................................................20

8 Service .........................................................24

8.1 Worldwide Service .............................................................24

8.2 US and Canada Service.......................................................24

8.2.1 Service at a US or Canada Service Center .................24

8.2.2 Factory Service .........................................................24

8.2.3 Factory Service Shipping Instructions .......................24

8.2.4 Crown’s Profit Protection Plan ...................................24

9 Warranty........................................................25

Crown Factory Service Information Form .......................................27

page 4

Operation Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

20 Hz–20 kHz

Power

20 Hz–20 kHz

Power

CTs 600

CTs 2000

150W

300W

600W

2-ohm Dual (per ch.)

4-ohm Dual (per ch.)

8-ohm Dual (per ch.)

16-ohm Dual (per ch.)

70V Dual (per ch.)

4-ohm Bridge

1000W

625W

1000W

2000W

2-ohm Dual (per ch.)

4-ohm Dual (per ch.)

8-ohm Dual (per ch.)

16-ohm Dual (per ch.)

70V Dual (per ch.)

100V Dual (per ch.)

4-ohm Bridge

8-ohm Bridge

16-ohm Bridge

8-ohm Bridge

140V Bridge

16-ohm Bridge

140V Bridge

1 Welcome

Building on the foundation of the Com-Tech^®

*20 Hz–20 kHz Power: refers to maximum

average power in watts from 20 Hz

to 20 kHz with 0.1% THD.

200V Bridge

•

Direct constant-voltage

*20 Hz–20 kHz Power: refers to maximum

average power in watts from 20 Hz

to 20 kHz with 0.35% THD.

Series, the Crown^®CTs Series offers new flexi-

bility and value for installed sound. The Com-

Tech Series was the first to offer independent

selection of high- and low-impedance opera-

tion for a specific channel, and CTs Series

amplifiers continue that tradition, with power

levels and features carefully chosen to perfectly

integrate into fixed install design requirements.

(70V/100V/140V/200V) or low-impedance

(2/4/8 ohm) operation. No switch

required.

Input sensitivity is independently select-

able for each channel. Choose low-imped-

ance (4/8 ohm), constant-voltage (70V/

100V/140V/200V), or 26 dB.

TLC protection circuitry protects the

amplifier from long-term excessive heat by

subtly and dynamically reducing the gain

only when necessary.

20 Hz–20 kHz

Power

Modern power amplifiers are sophisticated

pieces of engineering capable of producing

extremely high power levels. They must be

treated with respect and correctly installed if

they are to provide the many years of reliable

service for which they were designed.

CTs 3000

20 Hz–20 kHz

Power

1500W

1250W

625W

1500W

3000W

2500W

3000W

2-ohm Dual (per ch.)

4-ohm Dual (per ch.)

8-ohm Dual (per ch.)

16-ohm Dual (per ch.)

70V Dual (per ch.)

100V Dual (per ch.)

4-ohm Bridge

CTs 1200

JTS circuitry (CTs 600/1200 only) quickly

protects BJT output transistors from

unsafe operating conditions without shut-

ting the channel down. (Not applicable to

BCA amplifiers as they are inherently pro-

tected.)

250W

600W

300W

600W

500W

1200W

2-ohm Dual (per ch.)

4-ohm Dual (per ch.)

8-ohm Dual (per ch.)

16-ohm Dual (per ch.)

70V Dual (per ch.)

4-ohm Bridge

In addition, CTs Series amplifiers include a

number of features which require some expla-

nation before they can be used to their maxi-

mum advantage.

•

PIP2™ (Programmable Input Processor)

connector accepts accessory modules that

tailor the amplifier to suit specific applica-

tions.

Please take the time to study this manual so

that you can obtain the best possible service

from your amplifier.

8-ohm Bridge

16-ohm Bridge

100V Bridge

140V Bridge

200V Bridge

1.1 Features

Removable terminal block input connec-

tors, with “Y” Input Switch in the standard

PIP2-BBY module.

•

Switching Power Supply for reduced

weight.

*20 Hz–20 kHz Power: refers to maximum

average power in watts from 20 Hz

to 20 kHz with 0.1% THD.

*20 Hz–20 kHz Power: refers to maximum

average power in watts from 20 Hz

to 20 kHz with 0.35% THD.

•

High power-density, with all two-channel

models in a 2U chassis.

(Continued on next page)

Operation Manual

page 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

1 Welcome

Features (continued from page 4)

•

Legendary Crown class I (BCA) and class

AB+B (Multi-Mode ^®) output topologies

offer the best in amplifier reliability. CTs

600/1200 use Class AB+B; CTs 2000/

3000 use Class I.

2 How to Use This

Manual

•

Switchable high-pass filter for each chan-

nel provides low-frequency roll off to elim-

inate step down transformer saturation

when used in distributed systems.

This manual provides you with the necessary

information to safely and correctly setup and

operate your amplifier. It does not cover every

aspect of installation, setup or operation that

might occur under every condition. For addi-

tional information, please consult Crown’s

Amplifier Application Guide (available online at

www.crownaudio.com), Crown Tech Support,

your system installer or retailer.

Class I is the lowest distortion, lowest

noise, and highest performing topology

available among switch-mode amplifiers.

•

Comprehensive array of indicators includ-

ing Power, Data, and Bridge; along with

Ready, Signal, Clip, Thermal and Fault for

each channel, provide accurate diagnos-

tics.

•

Continuously-variable fans optimize cool-

ing efficiency.

Three Year, No-Fault, Fully-Transferable

Warranty completely protects your invest-

ment and guarantees its specifications.

•

Blue Power Indicator flashes if the ampli-

fier shuts off due to an under/over-voltage

condition on the AC mains.

We strongly recommend you read all instruc-

tions, warnings and cautions contained in this

manual. Also, for your protection, please send

in your warranty registration card today. And

save your bill of sale—it’s your official proof of

purchase.

•

Crown’s Profit Protection Plan guarantees

replacement of covered amps should they

fail at any time during the original three-

year warranty period (available in U.S.

only).

Advanced protection circuitry guards

against: shorted outputs, DC, mismatched

loads, general overheating, under-/over-

voltage, high-frequency overloads and

internal faults.

page 6

Operation Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

3 Setup

3.1 Unpack Your Amplifier

3.2 Install Your Amplifier

3.3 Ensure Proper Cooling

Please unpack and inspect your amplifier for

any damage that may have occurred during

transit. If damage is found, notify the transpor-

tation company immediately. Only you can ini-

tiate a claim for shipping damage. Crown will

be happy to help as needed. Save the shipping

carton as evidence of damage for the shipper’s

inspection.

CAUTION: Before you begin, make sure

your amplifier is disconnected from the

power source, with power switch in the

“off” position and all level controls

turned completely down (counterclock-

wise).

When using an equipment rack, mount units

directly on top of each other. Close any open

spaces in rack with blank panels. DO NOT

block front or rear air vents. The side walls of

the rack should be a minimum of two inches

(5.1 cm) away from the amplifier sides, and the

back of the rack should be a minimum of four

inches (10.2 cm) from the amplifier back panel.

Use a standard 19-inch (48.3 cm) equipment

rack. See Figure 3.1 for amplifier dimensions.

We also recommend that you save all packing

materials so you will have them if you ever

need to transport the unit. Never ship the

unit without the factory pack.

Figure 3.2 illustrates standard amplifier airflow.

You may also stack amps without using a cabi-

net.

NOTE: When transporting, amplifiers should be

supported at both front and back.

YOU WILL NEED (not supplied):

•

Input wiring cables

Output wiring cables

Rack for mounting amplifier (or a stable surface

for stacking)

WARNING: Before you start to set up

your amplifier, make sure you read and

observe the Important Safety Instruc-

tions found at the beginning of this

manual.

Figure 3.2 Airflow

FRONT

Figure 3.1 CTS 2-Channel Series Dimensions

Operation Manual

page 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

3 Setup

3.4 Choose Input Wire

and Connectors

Figure 3.3 shows connector pin assignments for

balanced wiring, and Figure 3.4 shows connec-

tor pin assignments for unbalanced wiring.

Figure 3.3

Balanced Input

Connector Wiring

NOTE: Custom wiring should only be per-

formed by qualified personnel.

3.5 Choose Output Wire and Con-

nectors

A protective cover is installed over the barrier-

strip output. Some models have a cover with two

holes. To remove this type of cover:

Figure 3.4

Unbalanced Input

Connector Wiring

1. Loosen screws inside top and bottom holes of

cover (see Figure 3.6).

2. Slide cover to left or right, then pull it off away

from the amplifier.

Crown recommends using professionally con-

structed, high-quality, two- or four-conductor,

heavy gauge speaker wire and connectors. You

may use terminal forks up to 10 AWG or bare

wire for your output connectors (see Figure 3.5).

To prevent the possibility of short-circuits, wrap

or otherwise insulate exposed loudspeaker cable

connectors. For best results, Crown recom-

mends Panduit part #PV10-10LF-L or equivalent

terminal fork. Screw spacing is shown in Figure

3.5.

Using the guidelines below, select the appropri-

ate size of wire based on the distance from

amplifier to speaker (low-impedance loads only).

Distance

Wire Size

16 AWG

14 AWG

12 AWG

10 AWG

up to 25 ft. (7.6m)

26-40 ft. (7.9-12.2m)

41-60 ft. (12.5-18.3m)

> 60 ft (18.3m)

CAUTION: Never use shielded cable for

output wiring.

Figure 3.6 How to Remove the Two-Holed

Barrier-Block Cover

Replace output cover after output wiring

is complete.

Figure 3.5 Typical Output Connector Wiring

page 8

Operation Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

3 Setup

3.6 Wire Your System

3.6.1 Dual 8/4/2 Mode

Typical input and output wiring, along with Attenuator

and Mode Switch settings are shown in Figures 3.6 and

3.7. Make sure the Mode switch is set to the “Dual” posi-

tion when operating in Dual mode.

INPUTS: Connect input wiring for each channel. The Y

switch on the rear PIP panel can be used to parallel the

channel inputs when only mono input signals are neces-

sary. The amplifier’s channel outputs are still indepen-

dent.

OUTPUTS: Maintain proper polarity (+/–) on

output connectors.

Figure 3.8 Attenuator and Mode-

Switch Settings for Dual Mode

Connect the Channel 1 speaker’s positive (+) lead to

amplifier Channel 1 positive terminal; repeat for negative

(–). Repeat Channel-2 wiring as for Channel 1. Refer to

Section 3.5 for output connector pin assignments.

Always route the input and output wires in

separate bundles.

Figure 3.7 System Wiring, Dual Mode.

3.6.2 Bridge-Mono 16/8/4 Mode

Typical input and output wiring, along with Attenuator

and Mode Switch settings, are shown in Figures 3.8 and

3.9. Make sure the Mode switch is set to the “Mono”

position when operating in Bridge-Mono mode.

INPUTS: Connect input wiring to Channel 1 only.

OUTPUTS: Connect the speaker across the positive ter-

minals of each channel pair. Do not use the negative ter-

minals of the channel pair when the pair is being

operated in Bridge-Mono mode. Refer to Section 3.5 for

output connector pin assignments.

NOTE: Crown provides a reference of wiring pin assign-

ments for commonly used connector types in the Crown

Amplifier Application Guide available at

www.crownaudio.com.

NOTE: When operating in Bridge-Mono mode,

turn down (full CCW) the Input Attenuator for

Channel 2. The Channel-1 Input Atttenuator

works both channels.

Figure 3.10 Attenuator and Mode-

Switch Settings for Bridge-Mono Mode

See the next page for constant-voltage operation.

Figure 3.9 System Wiring, Bridge-Mono Mode

Operation Manual

page 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

3 Setup

3.6.3 Dual 70V/100V Mode

Typical input and output wiring, along with Atten-

uator and Mode Switch settings are shown in Fig-

ures 3.10 and 3.11. Make sure the Mode switch is

set to the “Dual” position when operating in Dual

mode.

INPUTS: Connect input wiring to both channels.

OUTPUTS: In Dual Mode, the CTs 600/1200 can

power 25/50/70V lines; the CTs 2000/3000 can

power 25/50/70/100V lines. Connect each chan-

nel of output connectors to speakers that have the

appropriate transformers.

Figure 3.12 Attenuator and Mode-Switch

Settings for 70V/100V Operation

Always route the input and output wires in

separate bundles.

Figure 3.11 System Wiring and Y-Switch Setting for 70V/100V Operation

3.6.4 Bridge-Mono 140V/200V Mode

Typical input and output wiring, along with Atten-

uator and Mode Switch settings are shown in Fig-

ures 3.12 and 3.13. Make sure the Mode switch is

set to the “Mono” position when operating in

Bridge-Mono mode.

INPUTS: Connect input wiring to Channel 1 only.

OUTPUTS: In Bridge-Mono mode, the CTs 600/

1200 can power 140V lines; the CTs 2000/3000

can power 140V and 200V lines. Connect speak-

ers with 140V or 200V transformers across the

positive terminals of the channel pair. Do not use

the negative terminals of the channel pair when

the pair is being operated in Bridge-Mono mode.

Refer to Section 3.5 for output connector pin

assignments.

Figure 3.14 Attenuator and Mode-Switch

Settings for 140V/200V Operation

NOTE: When operating in Bridge-Mono

mode, turn down (full CCW) the Input

Attenuator for Channel 2. The Channel-1

Input Attenuator works both channels.

Figure 3.13 System Wiring and Y-Switch Setting for 140V/200V Operation

page 10

Operation Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

3 Setup

3.6.5 Dual Mode with “Y” Input

See Figure 3.14. This configuration feeds a mono

signal to both Channel 1 and Channel 2. In the

example in Figure 3.14, Channel 1 is driving a low-

impedance loudspeaker and Channel 2 is driving a

loudspeaker with a 70V transformer.

INPUTS:

Connect the signal to the Channel 1 input. On the

back panel, set the “Y” Input Switch to ON.

OUTPUTS:

Connect the Channel 1 speaker’s positive (+) lead

to Channel 1 positive terminal of amp; repeat for

negative (–).

Connect the Channel 2 speaker’s positive (+) lead

to Channel 2 positive terminal of amp; repeat for

negative (–).

See Figure 3.15. Turn up both Input Attenuators and

set the Mode Switch to Dual.

NOTE: When the “Y” Input Switch is on, the Chan-

nel 2 input can be used to daisy-chain to another

amplifier.

Figure 3.15 System Wiring for “Y” Input Mode

Always route the input and output wires in

separate bundles.

Figure 3.16

Attenuator and Mode-Switch

Settings for “Y” Input Mode

Operation Manual

page 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

3 Setup

3.7 Connect to AC Mains

4 Operation

4.1 Precautions

Your amplifier is protected from internal and external

faults, but you should still take the following precautions

for optimum performance and safety:

On the back panel, check whether your amplifier is labeled

for 120V or 220-240V AC mains. Connect your amplifier

to the corresponding AC mains power source (power out-

let) with the supplied AC power cordset. First, connect the

IEC end of the cordset to the IEC connector on the ampli-

fier. Then, with the amplifier in the OFF position, plug the

other end of the cordset into the AC mains.

1. Before use, your amplifier first must be configured for

proper operation, including input and output wiring

hookup. Improper wiring can result in serious operat-

ing difficulties. For information on wiring and config-

uration, please consult the Setup section of this

manual or, for advanced setup techniques, consult

Crown’s Amplifier Application Guide available online

at www.crownaudio.com.

WARNING: The third prong of this connector

(ground) is an important safety feature. Do not

attempt to disable this ground connection by

using an adapter or other methods.

Amplifiers don’t create energy. The AC mains voltage and

current must be sufficient to deliver the power you expect.

Check the amplifier’s back-panel label which specifies the

required AC mains voltage and frequency. The AC mains

voltage must be no more than 15% above the required

voltage, and no less than 25% below the required voltage.

The AC mains frequency must be within the required fre-

quency range. If you are unsure of the output voltage of

your AC mains, please consult your electrician.

2. Use care when making connections, selecting signal

sources and controlling the output level. The load you

save may be your own!

3. Do not short the ground lead of an output cable to the

input signal ground. This may form a ground loop

and cause oscillations.

4. Never connect the output to a power supply,

battery or power main. Electrical shock may

result.

3.8 Startup Procedure

Use the following procedure when first turning on your

amplifier:

5. Tampering with the circuitry, or making unauthorized

circuit changes may be hazardous and invalidates all

agency listings.

1. Turn down the level of your audio source.

2. Turn down the level controls of the amplifier.

6. Do not operate the amplifier with the red Clip LEDs

constantly flashing.

3. Turn on the “Power” switch. The Power indicator

should glow. Wait for the “Ready” LED to illuminate.

7. Do not overdrive the mixer, which will cause clipped

signal to be sent to the amplifier. Such signals will be

reproduced with extreme accuracy, and loudspeaker

damage may result.

4. Turn up the level of your audio source to an optimum

level.

5. Turn up the Level controls on the amplifier until the

desired loudness or power level is achieved. Verify

that the Signal LED is flashing.

8. Do not operate the amplifier with less than the rated

load impedance. Due to the amplifier’s output protec-

tion, such a configuration may result in premature

clipping and speaker damage.

6. Turn down the level of your audio source to its normal

range.

If you ever need to make any wiring or installation

changes, don’t forget to turn off the amplifier and discon-

nect the power cord.

Remember: Crown is not liable for damage that results

from overdriving other system components.

For help with determining your system’s optimum gain

structure (signal levels) please refer to the Crown Ampli-

fier Application Guide, available online at

www.crownaudio.com.

page 12

Operation Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

4 Operation

I. Power Indicator

4.2 Front Panel Controls

and Indicators

Signal Indicators

Blue LED indicates AC power has been

applied and is within the safe operating

range of the power supply. The LED will

flash when the AC line voltage is approxi-

mately 15% above or 25% below the nom-

inal rated value.

Three green LEDS per channel indicate the

amplifier’s input and output signal levels.

From bottom to top the LEDs are:

A. Fault Indicator

Red LED, one per channel, flashes when

the amplifier output channel has stopped

operating. Usually this means that the

amplifier must be serviced.

D. Signal: input signal is above –40 dBu.

E. –20 dB: amplifier output is within 20 dB of

clipping.

J. Data Indicator

Yellow LED indicates IQ Loop data activity

This LED is driven by the IQ-PIP2 module

via the PIP2 interface. Note: Data indicator

flashes only when the installed PIP module

is polled for data, or is polled to see

whether it is online.

F. –10 dB: amplifier output is within 10 dB of

B. Thermal Indicator

clipping.

Red LED, one per channel, illuminates

when the channel has shut down, or is

very near shutting down, due to thermal

stress or overload.

G. Clip Indicator

Red LED, one per channel, illuminates

when the channel’s output signal reaches

the onset of audible clipping. The Clip

Indicator also will illuminate during Ther-

mal Level Control (TLC) limiting or when

the input compressor/limiter is protecting

the amplifier from input overload.

C. Ready Indicator

K. Bridge Mode Indicator

Yellow LED illuminates when the rear-

panel Mode Switch is set to the “Bridge”

position

Green LED, one per channel, illuminates

when the channel is initialized and ready to

produce audio output. Indicator is off when

the channel is set to standby mode via the

IQ system.

L. Power Switch

H. Cooling Vents

Push-on / push-off switch.

Front-to-rear forced airflow.

Figure 4.1 CTs 600 front panel.

Operation Manual

page 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

4 Operation

The “Y” Input Switch also can be used to

daisy-chain the signal to another amplifier.

See Section 3.6.5 for details.

Sensitivity Switches

4.3 Back Panel Controls

and Connectors.

Behind the input panel are the Input Sensi-

tivity Switches. One 3-position switch per

channel selects various sensitivity set-

tings. See Section 5.2.4 for details and

diagram.

CTs 2000/3000 back panel is shown.

CTs 600/1200 look slightly different near

the Reset button.

S. Input Connectors

Balanced 3-pin terminal block connectors,

one per channel.

M. Power Cord Connector

Standard 15 amp IEC inlet. A circuit

breaker located near the IEC power inlet

protects the amplifier from excessive AC

current draw.

Q. Mode Switch

T. Channel Level Controls

One 21-position detented rotary attenuator

per channel, ranging from –100 dB to 0 dB

gain.

This two-position switch is used to select

the amplifier’s mode of operation: Dual or

Bridge Mono.

Dual mode is used for 2/4/8 ohms, for 70V

operation with the CTs 600/1200, and for

70/100V operation with the CTs 2000/

3000.

N. Reset Switch

U. High-Pass Filter

Resets the circuit breaker that protects the

power supply.

One 3-position switch per channel selects

between OFF, 35Hz and 70Hz 3rd-order fil-

ters.

O. Ventilation Grille

Bridge mode is used for 4/8/16 ohms, for

140V operation with the CTs 600/1200,

and for 100/140/200V operation with the

CTs 2000/3000.

Air flow is front to back. Do not block the

ventilation grilles.

V. Speaker Connectors

One four-pole touch-proof terminal strip.

Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks.

P. PIP ™ Input Panel

PIP2-BBY module includes two balanced

3-pin removable barrier connectors. The

“Y” Input Switch is described under

letter R.

Output Cover (not shown)

R. “Y” Input Switch

This covers the output connectors, pro-

tecting users from the connectors’ poten-

tially high voltage. This cover is required

for Class 2 wiring installations. See Sec-

tion 3.5 for details on removing covers that

have two holes.

When set to ON, this switch parallels the

input signals of the two channels, for use

when the input signal is mono. The ampli-

fier’s channel outputs are still independent.

Figure 4.2 CTs 2000 and 3000 Back Panel Controls and Connectors

page 14

Operation Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

5 Advanced Features

and Options

NOTE: For detailed information about

5.1.9 Inrush Limiting

5.1.3 Fault

these Crown amplifier features, please

consult the Crown Amplifier Application

Guide, available on the Crown website

at www.crownaudio.com

A soft-start circuit in the power supply mini-

mizes the amplifier’s current draw during

power-on.

The amplifier will light the Fault LED if the

amplifier output stage stops operating. If this

happens, see Section 8 for servicing informa-

tion.

5.1.10 Variable-speed Fans

5.1 Protection Systems

5.1.4 High-Pass Filters

Two continuously variable speed fans direct the

airflow through the amplifier for cooling.

Your Crown amplifier provides extensive pro-

tection and diagnostic capabilities, including

thermal level control, fault indicators, high-

pass filtering, DC protect, AC under/over volt-

age protection, inrush limiting, and variable-

speed fans.

Very low frequency signals contain no useful

musical energy, waste valuable amplifier power

and headroom, and can be damaging to your

speakers. Your Crown amplifier provides high-

pass filters to remove these signals from each

channel’s output.

5.2 Advanced Features

5.2.1 Switching Power Supply

Crown’s Switching Power Supply minimizes

the amplifier’s weight.

5.1.1 Thermal Level Control (TLC)

On the back panel are two 3-position 3rd-order

high-pass filter switches (one per channel) with

selections of Off, 35Hz and 70 Hz.

Typical non-switching power supplies require

large, heavy transformers in order to produce

the required power at the output stage. These

transformers must be large to operate at 50 to

60 Hz (standard AC supplied by the power

company).

If the amplifier becomes too hot for safe opera-

tion, the light will shine brightly and TLC will

engage the input compressor. By compressing

the input, the amplifier will not generate as

much heat and will have a chance to cool down.

The degree of compression is proportional to

the amount of overheating. This feature allows

the show to go on, rather than having the

amplifier shut down.

5.1.5 Low-Pass Filters

Gaussian-approximation ultrasonic filters pre-

vent ultrasonic feedback and HF burnout in

drivers. This type of filter preserves transient

reponse better than a Butterworth filter.

By contrast, switching power supplies can

operate with a much smaller (and lighter) trans-

former because they first convert the AC up to a

much higher frequency, thereby reducing

waste.

5.1.6 AC Under/Over Voltage

Protection

5.1.2 Junction Temperature Simu-

lation (JTS) (CTs 600/1200 only)

If the AC line voltage drops below 25% or rises

above 15% of the nominal operating voltage of

the amplifier, the amplifier’s power supply turns

off and the blue Power LED flashes. The ampli-

fier will turn back on when the AC line voltage

returns to safe operating levels (within +15% /

-25%).

The power supply is voltage-specific, allowing

use in regions using 120V or 240V.

JTS circuitry simulates the operation of the

amplifier’s output transistors, and compares it

against the transistors known Safe Operation

Area (SOA). If JTS sees that more power is

about to be asked of the output devices than

they are capable of delivering under the present

conditions, JTS immediately limits the drive

level until it falls within the SOA. Limiting is

proportional and kept to an absolute minimum-

only what is required to prevent the possibility

of output transistor damage.

5.2.2 Input Compressor

Prevent input/output overload.

5.2.3 Sleep Circuit

5.1.7 Circuit Breaker

Lowers standby power consumption by shut-

ting down the high-voltage supplies during idle

periods.

A circuit breaker located near the IEC power

inlet protects the amplifier from excessive AC

current draw.

NOTE: By default, the sleep circuit is not active

on the CTs 600/1200, but may be activated as a

service option.

This level of protection enables Crown to

increase output transistor utilization while also

greatly increasing amplifier reliability.

5.1.8 DC Output Servo

The output servo circuit protects your drivers

by eliminating DC offset, even in the presence

of very large asymmetrical signals.

Operation Manual

page 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

5 Advanced Features

and Options

5.3 Options

5.2.4 Input Sensitivity Switches

T-170V: See Figure 5.3. This is an autoformer that

allows 100V output from the CTs 600/1200, and

allows other amplifiers without direct constant voltage

output to be easily integrated into distributed systems.

To access the Input Sensitivity Switches, turn off the amplifier and remove the

PIP2-BBY Input Panel. The switches are in the top surface of the cavity behind the

Input Panel. One 3-position switch per channel selects among these settings: CTs

600/1200: 1.4V (8/4 ohms), 26 dB gain, and 1.4V (70V operation). CTs 2000/

3000: 1.4V (8/4 ohms), 26 dB gain, and 1.4V (70V) / 2V (100V). The Specifications

chapter lists the input sensitivity for the 26 dB gain setting.

TP-170V: See Figure 5.4. This is a rack-mountable

panel with four autoformers as described above.

Figure 5.3 170V

PIP Modules

Versatile PIP (Programmable Input Processor) mod-

ules provide flexible expansion features that can be

added to customize the amplifier. PIP modules plug

into the connector inside the back panel of the ampli-

fier. PIP modules are available with features ranging

from error-driven compressor/limiters to crossovers to

IQ control. Your amplifier is a PIP2 amplifier, which

means it can take advantage of the many advanced fea-

tures found in PIP2 modules. The CTs Series 2-chan-

nel models do not accept earlier PIP modules.

Visit the Crown website at www.crownaudio.com, or

contact Crown Customer Service, for descriptions of

available PIP and PIP2 modules.

Figure 5.1 Input Sensitivity Switches for CTs 600/1200

Figure 5.4 TP-170V (back view)

Figure 5.2 Input Sensitivity Switches for CTs 2000/3000

page 16

Operation Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

5 Advanced Features

and Options

5.3.1 Nominal Attenuation Settings

The signal level for each input can be attenuated accurately by

adjusting the 21-step Level Control (see Section 4.3). Figure 5.5

shows the attenuation in dB for each detent. The setting of the

input-sensitivity switch varies the actual attenation as shown.

Detent

26 dB

0.0

4/8 ohm or 70/100V

The accuracy of the attenuation varies with the setting. Expected

tolerances are:

Potentiometer steps 0-6 dB: 1 dB

Potentiometer steps 6-12 dB: 1.5 dB

Potentiometer steps 12-24 dB: 3 dB

Potentiometer steps 24-54 dB: 6 dB

0 (full CW)

0.0

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

3.5

3.0

5.0

4.0

6.5

5.0

8.0

6.0

9.5

7.0

11.0

13.0

14.5

16.0

18.0

20.0

22.0

24.0

26.0

30.0

42.0

54.0

OFF

8.0

9.0

10.5

12.0

13.5

15.0

18.0

21.0

24.0

36.0

48.0

OFF

20 (full CCW)

Figure 5.5 Attenuation vs. Detent of Level Controls for CTs 2-Channel Amplifiers

Operation Manual

page 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

6 Troubleshooting

CONDITION: Power indicator is

off.

CONDITION: Fault indicator is

flashing.

POSSIBLE REASON

POSSIBLE REASON:

•

The amplifier has lost AC power.

The amplifier’s Power switch is off.

•

The amplifier channel has stopped operat-

ing. Refer the unit to an authorized Crown

Service Center.

The amplifier is not plugged into the

power receptacle.

•

The amplifier output level is so high that

the power supply circuit breaker has

tripped. Allow the unit to cool. Turn down

the Level controls. Press the Reset Switch

on the back panel.

CONDITION: Distorted sound.

POSSIBLE REASON:

•

Load is wired incorrectly or Stereo/Mono

mode switch is set incorrectly. Check both.

•

Input is overlaoded by a signal level that is

too high. Turn down your amplifier level

controls, or turn down the input signal, until

the clip light goes out.

CONDITION: Power indicator is

flashing.

POSSIBLE REASON:

Note: If the signal sounds distorted even though

the Clip LED is off, the input signal may be dis-

torted before it reaches the amplifier input. Check

gain staging and output levels of the mixer or

preamp.

•

The AC line voltage has dropped below

25% or has risen above 15% of the nomi-

nal line voltage of the power supply.

CONDITION: Thermal indicator is

on.

POSSIBLE REASON:

•

The amplifier is becoming too hot for safe

operation. Allow amplifier to cool. Check

for loads less than 2 ohms, and for

excessive input levels. Check for proper

ventilation and proper mode-switch set-

ting.

“Off/Flashing/On” above means that

the LED can be off, or flashing, or on.

page 18

Operation Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

6 Troubleshooting

CONDITION: Data indicator not flash-

ing, even though PIP module is

installed and host computer IQ soft-

ware is active.

CONDITION: No sound, even though

the amp has power. Power LED is on with-

out flashing and the amp is receiving an input sig-

nal. Signal indicator is flashing.

POSSIBLE REASON:

•

Cable between computer and PIP module is

broken or not connected.

POSSIBLE REASON:

•

Speakers not connected.

Note: Data indicator flashes only when the installed

PIP2 module is polled for data, or is polled to see

whether it is online.

Open circuit due to speaker failure.

•

There is a short on the amplifier output. First

disconnect your speakers from the affected

channel(s) one by one to determine if one of

the loads is shorted.

•

Ready LED is off. Channel has been set to

standby mode via the IQ system.

CONDITION: No input signal. Signal

indicator is not flashing even though audio is

applied, and the channel is ready..

“Off/Flashing/On” above means that

the LED can be off, or flashing, or on.

POSSIBLE REASON:

•

Input signal level is very low.

Level controls are turned down.

Operation Manual

page 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

7 Specifications

Minimum Guaranteed Power

CTs 600

CTs 1200

CTs 2000

CTs 3000

(20 Hz - 20 kHz)

Power at 0.1% THD

Power at 0.35% THD

2-ohm Dual (per ch.)

150W

300W

250W

600W

1000W

1500W

4-ohm Dual (per ch.)

8-ohm Dual (per ch.)

300W

600W

1000W

1250W

16-ohm Dual (per ch.)

300W

625W

70V Dual (per ch.)

300W

600W

1000W

1500W

100V Dual (per ch.)

300W*

300W

600W*

500W

1000W

1500W

4-ohm Bridge

2000W

3000W

8-ohm Bridge

600W

1200W

1200W*

1200W

1200W*

CTs 1200

0.25 dB

< 105 dB

< 0.1%

2000W

3000W

16-ohm Bridge

600W

2000W

2500W

100V Bridge

600W*

600W

2000W

3000W

140V Bridge

2000W

3000W

200V Bridge

600W*

CTs 600

0.25 dB

< 105 dB

< 0.1%

2000W

3000W

Performance

CTs 2000

0.25 dB

< 105 dB

< 0.35%

CTs 3000

0.25 dB

< 105 dB

< 0.35%

Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz - 20 kHz)

Signal to Noise Ratio (ref. rated power, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, A-weighted)

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at full rated power, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz

Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) 60 Hz and 7 kHz at 4:1, from –40 dB to

full rated power

Damping Factor:

10 Hz to 100 Hz

> 3000

Crosstalk (below rated power)

20 Hz to 1kHz

> 80 dB

50 dB

> 80 dB

50 dB

> 80 dB

50 dB

> 80 dB

50 dB

Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz, typical)

DC Output Offset

< 2 mV

< 2mV

< 2 mV

Input Impedance nominally balanced, nominally unbalanced

10 k ohms, 5 k ohms

* With T-170V or TP-170V.

page 20

Operation Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

7 Specifications

Performance

CTs 600

CTs 1200

CTs 2000

CTs 3000

Maximum Input Level

Before input compression

Absolute maximum

+20 dBu

+ 32 dBu

+20 dBu

+ 32 dBu

+20 dBu

+ 32 dBu

+20 dBu

+ 32 dBu

Load Impedance (Note: Safe with all types of loads)

Stereo

2, 4, 8, 16 ohms and 70V

4, 8, 16 and 140V

2, 4, 8, 16 ohms and 70V

4, 8, 16 and 140V

2, 4, 8, 16, 70V,

and 100V

2, 4, 8, 16, 70V,

and 100V

Bridge Mono

4, 8, 16, 140V , 200V

4, 8, 16, 140V, 200V

Voltage Gain (at maximum level setting)

8/4 Ohm Operation

26 dB

70V Operation

100V Operation

35:1 (31 dB)

20:1 (26 dB)

50:1 (34 dB)

20:1 (26 dB)

50:1 (34 dB)

63.9:1 (36 dB)

20:1 (26 dB)

50:1 (34 dB)

71.4:1 (37 dB)

20:1 (26 dB)

50:1 (34 dB)

Input Sensitivity

2/4/8 ohms

70V

1.4V

2.0V

1.4V

2.0V

100 V

26 dB gain

4 ohm load: 1.74V.

8 ohm load: 2.46V

4 ohm load: 2.46V.

8 ohm load: 3.47V

4 ohm load: 3.17V.

8 ohm load: 4.48V

4 ohm load: 3.88V.

8 ohm load: 5.01V

Required AC Mains (+15%, – 25%)

Power Draw at Idle (120 VAC mains)

Overall Group Delay

120V/60 Hz, 230V/50 Hz

24W (Standby Mode)

< 120 usec

120V/60 Hz, 230V/50 Hz

24W (Standby Mode)

< 120 usec

120V/60 Hz, 230V/50 Hz

35W (Standby Mode)

< 120 usec

120V/60 Hz, 230V/50 Hz

35W (Standby Mode)

< 120 usec

Cooling

Continuously variable speed

forced air, front-to-back airflow

Continuously variable speed

forced air, front-to-back airflow

Continuously variable speed

forced air, front-to-back airflow

Continuously variable speed

forced air, front-to-back airflow

Dimensions

Width

Height

19 in. (48.3 cm.)

3.5 in. (8.9 cm.)

19 in. (48.3 cm.)

3.5 in. (8.9 cm.)

19 in. (48.3 cm.)

3.5 in. (8.9 cm.)

19 in. (48.3 cm.)

3.5 in. (8.9 cm.)

Depth

14.25 in. (36.2 cm.)

Net Weight

Shipping Weight

22.8 lb (10.3 kg),

27.7 lb (12.6 kg)

23.4 lb (10.6 kg),

28. 3 l b ( 1 2. 8 kg)

27.0 lb (12.2 kg)

32.0 lb (14.5 kg)

27.7 lb (12.6 kg)

32.7 lb (14.8 kg)

Operation Manual

page 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

7 Specifications

Figure 7.2 CTs 600/1200 Typical Crosstalk vs. Frequency

Figure 7.1 CTs 600/1200 Typical Frequency Response (1 W, 8 ohms)

Figure 7.3

CTs 600/1200

Typical Damping Factor

vs. Frequency

page 22

Operation Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

7 Specifications

Figure 7.4 CTs 2000/3000 Typical Frequency Response (1W)

Figure 7.5 CTs 2000/3000 Typical Crosstalk vs. Frequency

Figure 7.6

CTs 2000/3000

Typical Damping Factor

vs. Frequency

Operation Manual

page 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

8 Service

Crown amplifiers are quality units that rarely require

servicing. Before returning your unit for servicing,

please contact Crown Technical Support to verify

the need for servicing.

chase and the defective unit to the Crown

factory.

ton sealing tape. Do not use light boxes or

“peanuts.” Damage caused by poor packing

cannot be covered under warranty.

For warranty service, we will pay for ground ship-

ping both ways in the United States. Contact Crown

Factory Service to obtain prepaid shipping labels

prior to sending the unit. Or, if you prefer, you may

prepay the cost of shipping, and Crown will reim-

burse you. Send copies of the shipping receipts to

Crown to receive reimbursement.

4. Do not ship the unit in any kind of cabinet

(wood or metal). Ignoring this warning may

result in extensive damage to the unit and the

cabinet. Accessories are not needed—do not

send the product documentation, cables and

other hardware.

This unit has very sophisticated circuitry which

should only be serviced by a fully trained techni-

cian. This is one reason why each unit bears the fol-

lowing label:

CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, do not

remove covers. No user serviceable parts

inside. Refer servicing to a qualified techni-

cian.

Your repaired unit will be returned via UPS ground.

Please contact us if other arrangements are

required.

If you have any questions, please contact Crown

Factory Service.

Crown Factory Service

1718 W. Mishawaka Rd.,

Elkhart, Indiana 46517 U.S.A.

8.1 Worldwide Service

8.2.3 Factory Service Shipping

Instructions:

Service may be obtained from an authorized service

center. (Contact your local Crown/Amcron repre-

sentative or our office for a list of authorized service

centers.) To obtain service, simply present the bill of

sale as proof of purchase along with the defective

unit to an authorized service center. They will handle

the necessary paperwork and repair.

1. Before sending a Crown product to the factory

for service, first call the Crown Service Depart-

ment for a return authorization (RA) number.

Telephone: 574-294-8200

800-342-6939 (North America,

Puerto Rico, and Virgin Islands only)

2. Be sure to fill out the service information form

that follows and enclose it with your shipment,

either inside the box or in a packing slip enve-

lope securely attached to the outside of the

shipping carton. Do not send the service infor-

mation form separately. If you are sending the

unit from a Shipping Center, we recommend

taping the form to the product. We also recom-

mend recording the serial number and model

before shipping for your reference.

Facsimile:

574-294-8301 (Technical Support)

574-294-8124 (Factory Service)

Remember to transport your unit in the original fac-

tory pack.

Internet:

http://www.crownaudio.com

8.2 US and Canada Service

8.2.4 Crown’s Profit Protection Plan

Service may be obtained in one of two ways: from

an authorized service center or from the factory. You

may choose either. It is important that you have your

copy of the bill of sale as your proof of purchase.

In the United States, your CTs series amplifier is

also covered by Crown’s advance-replacement

Profit Protection Plan, an enhancement to Crown’s

exceptional Three-Year, No-Fault, Full Warranty.

Crown’s Profit Protection Plan guarantees replace-

ment of your covered amplifier should it fail at any

time during the original three-year warranty period

following the date of original purchase.

3. Keep a copy of the serial number and model.

8.2.1 Service at a US or Canada Ser-

vice Center

To ensure the safe transportation of your unit to

the factory, ship it in an original factory packing

container. If you don’t have the original carton,

you may obtain a product service foam-in-

place shipping pack from Crown Factory Ser-

vice at the number listed below. For non-war-

ranty service, you may also provide your own

shipping pack, however we still recommend

using a Crown Supplied Shipping Container.

Minimum recommended requirements for

materials are as follows: 275 P.S.I. burst test

Double-Wall carton that allows for 2-inch solid

Styrofoam on all six sides of unit or 3 inches of

plastic bubble wrap on all six sides of unit;

securely seal the package with an adequate car-

This method usually saves the most time and effort.

Simply present your bill of sale along with the

defective unit to an authorized service center to

obtain service. They will handle the necessary

paperwork and repair. Remember to transport the

unit in the original factory pack. A list of authorized

service centers in your area can be obtained from

the Crown website at www.crownaudio.com, or by

calling Crown Factory Service.

Simply contact your local Crown dealer or distribu-

tor with model and serial number information to ini-

tiate a claim. Your dealer will supply full details on

return procedures for the defective unit as well as

standard and optional delivery times and methods

for the replacement amplifier. Before any claim will

be honored, Crown Factory Service will verify that

there is a problem with the unit.

8.2.2 Factory Service

For more information on the Profit Protection Plan,

please contact Crown Factory Service or your local

Crown representative.

To obtain factory service, fill out the service

information page found in the back of this man-

ual and send it along with your proof of pur-

page 24

Operation Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

9 Warranty

UNITED STATES & CANADA

SUMMARY OF WARRANTY

ing interest, insurance, closing costs, and other

finance charges less a reasonable depreciation

on the product from the date of original pur-

chase. Warranty work can only be performed at

our authorized service centers or at the factory.

Warranty work for some products can only be

performed at our factory. We will remedy the

defect and ship the product from the service cen-

ter or our factory within a reasonable time after

receipt of the defective product at our authorized

service center or our factory. All expenses in

remedying the defect, including surface shipping

costs in the United States, will be borne by us.

(You must bear the expense of shipping the

product between any foreign country and the port

of entry in the United States including the return

shipment, and all taxes, duties, and other cus-

toms fees for such foreign shipments.)

FROM ANY DEFECT IN THE NEW CROWN

PRODUCT. THIS INCLUDES ANY DAMAGE TO

ANOTHER PRODUCT OR PRODUCTS RESULT-

ING FROM SUCH A DEFECT. SOME STATES DO

NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATIONS

OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-

AGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLU-

SION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

Crown International, 1718 West Mishawaka

Road, Elkhart, Indiana 46517-4095 U.S.A. war-

rants to you, the ORIGINAL PURCHASER and

ANY SUBSEQUENT OWNER of each NEW Crown

product, for a period of three (3) years from the

date of purchase by the original purchaser (the

“warranty period”) that the new Crown product is

free of defects in materials and workmanship. We

further warrant the new Crown product regard-

less of the reason for failure, except as excluded

in this Warranty.

WARRANTY ALTERATIONS

No person has the authority to enlarge, amend,

or modify this Crown Warranty. This Crown

Warranty is not extended by the length of time

which you are deprived of the use of the new

Crown product. Repairs and replacement parts

provided under the terms of this Crown War-

ranty shall carry only the unexpired portion of

this Crown Warranty.

ITEMS EXCLUDED FROM THIS

CROWN WARRANTY

This Crown Warranty is in effect only for failure of

a new Crown product which occurred within the

Warranty Period. It does not cover any product

which has been damaged because of any inten-

tional misuse, accident, negligence, or loss which

is covered under any of your insurance contracts.

This Crown Warranty also does not extend to the

new Crown product if the serial number has been

defaced, altered, or removed.

HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY

SERVICE

DESIGN CHANGES

We reserve the right to change the design of any

product from time to time without notice and with

no obligation to make corresponding changes in

products previously manufactured.

You must notify us of your need for warranty ser-

vice within the warranty period. All components

must be shipped in a factory pack, which, if

needed, may be obtained from us free of charge.

Corrective action will be taken within a reason-

able time of the date of receipt of the defective

product by us or our authorized service center. If

the repairs made by us or our authorized service

center are not satisfactory, notify us or our autho-

rized service center immediately.

LEGAL REMEDIES OF PURCHASER

WHAT THE WARRANTOR WILL DO

THIS CROWN WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPE-

CIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, YOU MAY ALSO HAVE

OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO

STATE. No action to enforce this Crown War-

ranty shall be commenced after expiration of the

warranty period.

We will remedy any defect, regardless of the rea-

son for failure (except as excluded), by repair,

replacement, or refund. We may not elect refund

unless you agree, or unless we are unable to pro-

vide replacement, and repair is not practical or

cannot be timely made. If a refund is elected,

then you must make the defective or malfunc-

tioning product available to us free and clear of

all liens or other encumbrances. The refund will

be equal to the actual purchase price, not includ-

DISCLAIMER OF CONSEQUENTIAL

AND INCIDENTAL DAMAGES

THIS STATEMENT OF WARRANTY SUPERSEDES

ANY OTHERS CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL

YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RECOVER FROM

US ANY INCIDENTAL DAMAGES RESULTING

FOR CROWN PRODUCTS

12/01

Operation Manual

page 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

9 Warranty

WORLDWIDE EXCEPT USA & CANADA

SUMMARY OF WARRANTY

WHAT THE WARRANTOR WILL DO

DISCLAIMER OF CONSEQUENTIAL

AND INCIDENTAL DAMAGES

Crown International, 1718 West Mishawaka Road,

Elkhart, Indiana 46517-4095 U.S.A. warrants to

you, the ORIGINAL PURCHASER and ANY SUB-

SEQUENT OWNER of each NEW Crown1 product,

for a period of three (3) years from the date of pur-

chase by the original purchaser (the “warranty

period”) that the new Crown product is free of

defects in materials and workmanship, and we

further warrant the new Crown product regardless

of the reason for failure, except as excluded in this

Warranty.

We will remedy any defect, regardless of the rea-

son for failure (except as excluded), by repair,

replacement, or refund. We may not elect refund

unless you agree, or unless we are unable to pro-

vide replacement, and repair is not practical or

cannot be timely made. If a refund is elected, then

you must make the defective or malfunctioning

product available to us free and clear of all liens

or other encumbrances. The refund will be equal

to the actual purchase price, not including inter-

est, insurance, closing costs, and other finance

charges less a reasonable depreciation on the

product from the date of original purchase. War-

ranty work can only be performed at our autho-

rized service centers. We will remedy the defect

and ship the product from the service center

within a reasonable time after receipt of the defec-

tive product at our authorized service center.

YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RECOVER FROM US

ANY INCIDENTAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM

ANY DEFECT IN THE NEW CROWN PRODUCT.

THIS INCLUDES ANY DAMAGE TO ANOTHER

PRODUCT OR PRODUCTS RESULTING FROM

SUCH A DEFECT.

WARRANTY ALTERATIONS

No person has the authority to enlarge, amend, or

modify this Crown Warranty. This Crown Warranty

is not extended by the length of time which you are

deprived of the use of the new Crown product.

Repairs and replacement parts provided under the

terms of this Crown Warranty shall carry only the

unexpired portion of this Crown Warranty.

Note: If your unit bears the name “Amcron,” please substitute

it for the name “Crown” in this warranty.

ITEMS EXCLUDED FROM THIS

CROWN WARANTY

This Crown Warranty is in effect only for failure

of a new Crown product which occurred within

the Warranty Period. It does not cover any prod-

uct which has been damaged because of any

intentional misuse, accident, negligence, or loss

which is covered under any of your insurance

contracts. This Crown Warranty also does not

extend to the new Crown product if the serial

number has been defaced, altered, or removed.

DESIGN CHANGES

We reserve the right to change the design of any

product from time to time without notice and with

no obligation to make corresponding changes in

products previously manufactured.

HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY

SERVICE

You must notify your local Crown importer of

your need for warranty service within the warranty

period. All components must be shipped in the

original box. Corrective action will be taken within

a reasonable time of the date of receipt of the

defective product by our authorized service center.

If the repairs made by our authorized service cen-

ter are not satisfactory, notify our authorized ser-

vice center immediately.

LEGAL REMEDIES OF PURCHASER

No action to enforce this Crown Warranty shall be

commenced after expiration of the warranty period.

THIS STATEMENT OF WARRANTY SUPERSEDES

ANY OTHERS CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL FOR

CROWN PRODUCTS.

7/01

page 26

Operation Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CTs 2-Channel Power Amplifiers

Crown Factory Service Information

Shipping Address: Crown Factory Service, 1718 W. Mishawaka Rd., Elkhart, IN 46517

Phone: 1-800-342-6939 or 1-574-294-8200 Fax: 1-574-294-8124

Owner’s Name : ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Shipping Address: ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Phone Number: ________________________________Fax Number: ________________________________ Email ________________________________________________________________________________

Model: __________________________________________________________________________________ Serial Number: ________________________________________________________________________

Purchase Date : ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NATURE OF PROBLEM

(Be sure to describe the conditions that existed when the problem occurred and what attempts were made to correct it.)

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Other equipment in system: ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If warranty has expired, payment will be: ! Cash/Check

! Visa

! Master Card

! C.O.D.

! Purchase Order for Crown Dealer

Card Number:___________________________________ Exp. Date:___________________

Signature:______________________________________________________________________

ENCLOSE THIS PORTION WITH THE UNIT. DO NOT MAIL SEPARATELY.

Operation Manual

page 27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2561953A

REV. A Printed 8/03

Printed in U.S.A.

Addendum To Operation Manual

Note: This addendum pertains to

Section 3 - Setup

Section 5 - Advanced Features and Options

Section 9 - Service

It is important that you review this addendum before reviewing the Operation

Manual.

Section 3

With reference to the DUAL/MONO mode switch:

Dual mode allows each amplifier channel to operate independently like a stereo amplifier.

Installation is intuitive - input Channel 1 feeds output Channel 1 and input Channel 2 feeds

output Channel 2. To put the amplifier into the Dual mode, turn it off, slide the DUAL/

MONO switch to DUAL, and properly connect the output wiring.

The MONO switch setting is the BRIDGE-MONO mode and is used to drive loads with a

total impedance of at least 4 ohms. For distributed loudspeaker systems, 140 volts (twice the

normal 70- volt output) is produced. To put the amplifier into the Bridge-Mono mode, turn it

off, and slide the DUAL/MONO switch to MONO. Both outputs will receive the signal from

Channel 1 with the output of Channel 2 inverted so it can be bridged with the Channel 1

output. Please note that there is no provision for paralleling the outputs to obtain a

single high-powered 70-volt constant voltage output.

Section 5

Federal Signal will not offer the T- 170V, TP- 170V, or PIP Modules as indicated in Section

5.3 -Options.

Section 9

For any service related issues, please contact Crown Technical Support. Return the unit to

Crown Factory Service, or to a Crown authorized service center if repairs need to be made.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODELS AR2000-M, AR2000-P AND AR2000-Z

AUDIO ROUTER DEVICES

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

2561533C

REV. C 12/01

Printed in U.S.A.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

FOR

MODELS AR2000-M, AR2000-P AND AR2000-Z, AUDIO ROUTER DEVICES

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS

phone. The unit can also be used to play background

music generated from an external source over the

Audio Router system.

People’s safety depends on your safe installation

of our products. It is important to read, understand

and follow all instructions shipped with this product.

The Model AR2000-M is an audio multiplexing

device. It is capable of handling two inputs from any

of three different selected source voltages of 1, 25 or

70 volts. The unit has 8 selectable zones which either

the A or the B source is routed to. There is an all call

button that selects all zones. There are also 8 pro-

grammable presets on the unit. The presets are

initiated by the front panel buttons or by remote

contacts wired to the back panel. The front panel

also has a monitor speaker jack. A microphone jack

is also available for use with a MSB-1. The micro-

phone has priority over the two user supplied

sources. The telephone feature is protected by an 8

key password. Options available allow changing the

password and recording a message for broadcasting.

Commands entered via the telephone key pad allow

the user to send a message to specified zones. The

microphone and the telephone interface have the

same priority. If the microphone is in use, the tele-

phone interface is disabled. If the phone message

system is in use, the microphone is disabled.

Selection of mounting location for this device, its

controls and routing of wiring should be made by the

Facilities Engineer and the Safety Engineer. Listed

below are other important safety instructions and

precautions you should follow.

•

This unit must be installed and maintained

by a qualified electrician in accordance with

the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) or

other national or local codes, under the

direction of the local authority having juris-

diction.

•

Do not connect this unit to system wiring

when circuits are energized.

For optimum sound distribution do not

overload the output lines.

All audio devices produce loud sounds which,

in certain circumstances, may cause perma-

nent hearing loss. Take appropriate precau-

tions such as wearing hearing protection.

Recommendations in OSHA Sound Level

Standard (29 CFR 1910) should not be ex-

ceeded.

If more than eight zones or eight presets are

needed by the user, a separate AR2000-Z (See Figure

1-2), zone unit, or AR2000-P (See Figure 1-3), preset

unit is available. Each AR2000-Z or AR2000-P unit

will add an additional eight zone or preset controls

respectively. Up to seven additional Preset or Zone

units may be added for a total of 64 zones and 64

presets.

•

After installation and completion of initial

system test, provide a copy of this instruction

sheet to all personnel responsible for opera-

tion, periodic testing and maintenance of this

equipment.

The Model MNC-1 microphone is a hand held,

noise canceling microphone that is ideal for use as a

local microphone. The Model MSB-1 microphone (See

Figure 1-4) is a base station type microphone de-

signed for desktop operation.

GENERAL.

1-1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

The Model AR2000-M may be installed in indoor

installations only as a rack mounted device.

The Model AR2000-M is a rack mount unit that

will fit any standard 19" rack mount cabinet. The

Model AR2000-M can be used for a variety of priori-

tized signaling purposes, such as playing background

music, paging, start and dismissal, phone messaging

and other communication applications. Additional

advantages of the Model AR2000-M include economi-

cal system expansion and long term system flexibil-

ity.

The Model AR2000-M (see figure 1-1) Audio

Router, is a UL listed and cUL certified central

control device that is capable of routing a selected

audio input to specific zones. It can control signals to

speakers designed for 25Vrms line operation or

70Vrms line operation. It can also control 1Vrms

signals intended to be amplified with a separate

amplification device. The AR2000-M has a public

address (PA) function so voice messages or instruc-

tions can be announced over the Audio Router system

through an optional Model MSB-1 or MNC-1 Micro-

The Model AR2000-M routes audio signals and

applies them through zone outputs to the devices in

the system. The AR2000-M connects easily with

-1-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ALL CALL

PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8

CH A

PHONE

ALARM

POWER

AUX SPEAKER

FEDERAL

SIGNAL

CORPORATION

UNIVERSITY PARK, IL U.S.A.

MICROPHONE

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5

ZONE 6

ZONE 7

ZONE 8

CH B

ALL CANCEL

AR2000-M

290A4120-01

Figure 1-1.

Selectone amplified speakers. A Model AM25CK or

AM70CK Connector Kit is required in each Selectone

device to connect it to the signal line. The Audio

Router device supplies 15W at either 25Vrms or

70Vrms. An additional amplifier must be supplied to

obtain higher wattage levels. Care must be taken to

ensure that the total line impedance of all the con-

nected devices does not cause the line voltage to drop.

to be sent to the selected speakers; releasing the

microphone will allow Channel A or B operation to

resume.

Keying the Microphone button will allow the

user to direct audio to specific zones (default is All-

Call). The user may select zones using either indi-

vidual speaker or preset buttons; Channel A or B

operation will not be interrupted until the micro-

phone is actually keyed. Releasing the microphone

will allow Channel A or B to resume operation on its

selected speakers.

Each preset can be manually activated locally

with its associated push button switch on the front

panel or with a contact closure at the associated

preset control input on the back panel. Whenever a

preset is activated, either locally or remotely, its

associated front panel push button LED illuminates

to indicate that the preset has been activated. The

LED remains lit until the preset is deactivated or the

remote contact closure is removed. As an added

feature, when a preset is remotely activated, the

associated LED illuminates and flashes until the

remote contact closure is removed. All AR2000-M

controls are located on the front panel except gain

adjustments which are made on the back panel

during installation.

Pressing the All Call button (whether the unit is

in Microphone mode or Channel A/B mode) will cause

all zones to be selected. Pressing any individual zone

when All Call is lit, however, will cancel all the zones

except that one.

Pressing All Call will perform the following

function:

If all of the zones are not selected, “All Call” will

select all 64 zones. Otherwise, pressing “All Call” will

cancel all of the zones.

Operation (normal mode)

Telephone operation

Pressing the Channel A or Channel B button

will immediately switch the input to that channel;

the speaker indicator lights will indicate what

speakers are connected. Pushing a speaker button

will turn that speaker on or off; pushing a preset

button will select speakers per that preset, and may

also select Channel A or B (if that preset was config-

ured for a specific channel). Keying the microphone

while in this mode will cause the microphone signal

When the line attached to the Router is called,

the router will answer with the Message “ENTER

PASSWORD”. The caller is required to enter their 8

digit password. The caller is given 2 chances to enter

the correct password.

If the correct password is not entered, the caller

hears the message “GOODBYE” and the system

hangs up the phone line.

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5

ZONE 6

ZONE 7

ZONE 8

FEDERAL

SIGNAL

POWER

CORPORATION

UNIVERSITY PARK, IL U.S.A.

AR2000-Z

290A4120-02

Figure 1-2.

-2-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8

FEDERAL

SIGNAL

POWER

CORPORATION

UNIVERSITY PARK, IL U.S.A.

AR2000-P

290A4120-03

Figure 1-3.

If the correct password is entered the caller will

hear the message “PRESS 9 KEY TO CHANGE THE

PASSWORD OR 6 KEY TO RECORD A MESSAGE”.

Default is to all zones. Phone receiving is

disabled during message playback; therefore, subse-

quent calls must wait for the current message to be

completed before another recording will take place.

If the caller presses the 9 key, the message

“ENTER NEW PASSWORD” will inform the caller to

enter a new password. The same new password must

be entered twice. Otherwise, the caller will hear the

message “PASSWORD NOT CHANGED” then the

message “GOODBYE” and the system hangs up the

phone line. If the new password is successfully

entered twice, the caller will hear the message

“PASSWORD CHANGED” then the message

“GOODBYE” and the system hangs up the phone

line.

Preset operation

The preset optos are a combination of edge and

level-tripped. If the system sees an active edge on an

opto, it will set the input and output relays for the

corresponding preset. The relays will remain set

until the input goes away.

Setting a Preset:

To set a preset, select the zones desired for the

preset by pressing and releasing the appropriate zone

button. The LED corresponding to that zone will

illuminate. Select the input source (Channel A or

Channel B) for that preset. Press and hold the

appropriate preset button until it begins to flash.

The preset is now set.

If the caller presses the 6 key, the message

“RECORD MESSAGE, PRESS # KEY TO BROAD-

CAST YOUR MESSAGE” prompts the caller to start

speaking. The message can be up to 90 seconds long.

If the user exceeds 90 second duration, the message

will not play back.

To recall a preset simply select the preset by

pressing and releasing the associated preset button.

At any time during the call, the caller can enter

the # key or hang-up the phone to exit. Also, when a

key input is necessary, the caller has 5 seconds to

enter a key or the system hangs up automatically.

1-2. CHASSIS DESCRIPTION.

The Model AR2000-M is assembled in a black,

sprayed aluminum 3-piece housing approximately

17.5” wide by 14.25" deep by 3.5" high. It is intended

to be rack mounted in a standard 19” rack mount

cabinet.

The password can be returned to the default

“12345678” by opening the cover of the Router and

setting switch SW1 position #4 to the “ON” position

for 5 seconds with the power “ON”.

The housing is held together with eighteen

screws, eight on the front panel, six on the rear panel

and four securing the top to the sides.

The main printed circuit board is attached to the

lower housing with seven screws. Separate wiring

harnesses connect the front and rear boards to the

main printed circuit board. The front panel switches

are designated as CH A, CH B, ALL CALL, CANCEL

ZONE 1 through ZONE 8 and PRESET 1 through

PRESET 8.

The Model AR2000-P is assembled in a black,

sprayed aluminum 3-piece housing approximately

17.5” wide by 10.125" deep by 1.75" high. It is in-

tended to be rack mounted in a standard 19” rack

mount cabinet. The housing is held together with

290A4120-04

Figure 1-4.

-3-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

twelve screws, four on the front panel, four on the

rear panel and four securing the top to the sides. The

front panel switches are designated as PRESET 1

through PRESET 8.

1-4. POWER.

WARNING

In order to prevent power to the AR2000-M

from being accidentally turned off, the unit

has a power switch located on the back of the

unit. Before performing any installation or

maintenance, ensure that power is discon-

nected.

The Model AR2000-Z is assembled in a black,

sprayed aluminum 3-piece housing approximately

17.5” wide by 10.125" deep by 1.75" high. It is in-

tended to be rack mounted in a standard 19” rack

mount cabinet. The housing is held together with

twelve screws, four on the front panel, four on the

rear panel and four securing the top to the sides. The

front panel switches are designated as ZONE 1

through ZONE 8.

The front panel has a green LED to indicate the

presence of primary power. It also has a red LED to

indicate the presence of secondary power in use. The

AR2000-M can be operated from either a 120VAC,

240VAC or a 24VDC power source. The AC power is

connected via the power cord, which requires manual

switching in order to operate. 24VDC Backup con-

nects via the rear terminals directly underneath the

4-Amp, Bussman-type GMT indicating fuse.

1-3. CONTROL CIRCUITRY.

A. Control Circuitry.

The control circuitry in the AR2000-M has a

built-in priority level feature. The local microphone

has the highest priority level when activated. If a

preset is initiated by contact closure, the AR2000-M

will grant that preset priority. The Audio Router will

store the current selection first, then activate the

preset. Once the contact closure is removed, the

AR2000-M will return the system to the previous

condition. Pressing cancel will deactivate any cur-

rently active selections.

WARNING

If this unit is to be connected to a non-power

limited 24 volt dc supply, the National Electri-

cal Code (NFPA 70) requires that those leads

be separated from other classes of wiring

connected to this unit.

The AR2000-P and the AR2000-Z obtain power

directly from the AR2000-M.

1-5. AUDIO INPUTS.

B. All CALL Pushbutton.

Channel A and Channel B inputs are provided

in the back of the unit to couple standard 1 volt audio

signal from a background music source such as a

radio receiver, CD player or a tape player. The inputs

can also be selected to accept a 25Vrms or 70Vrms

input source. The Channel A input is selectable from

the front panel by depressing the Channel A selection

button. To select the Channel B input, depress the

Channel B selection button on the front panel. Only

Channel A or Channel B may be activated at one

time. It is not possible to activate both Channel A

and Channel B audio sources simultaneously.

The ALL CALL pushbutton switch selects

and connects all zones to the currently selected input

source. Pressing the ALL CALL again returns the

system to the previous condition.

C. CANCEL Pushbutton.

The CANCEL pushbutton when pressed will

reset all the manually activated signaling functions

of the AR2000-M.

D. MONITOR SPKR.

A monitor speaker may be connected to the

unit at this output. Audio to this output will exist

during all conditions except when the microphone is

in use. This prevents any feedback from the micro-

phone.

1-6. MICROPHONE INPUT OPTION.

A Federal Signal Model MSB-1 microphone can

be connected directly to the AR2000-M via the

modular jack provided on the front of the unit (high-

est priority).

E. ADDITIONAL ZONES.

An AR2000-Z may be connected to add on

additional 8 zones of control. If desired, up to seven

(7) total AR2000-Z units may be added to provide a

total of 64 zones.

1-7. TELEPHONE INPUT OPTION.

A standard telephone line can be connected

directly to the AR2000-M via the modular phone jack

provided at the back of the unit. This allows the user

to contact the AR2000-M via phone, record a message

and deliver it to zones selected by the phone line

user.

F. ADDITIONAL PRESETS.

An AR2000-P may be connected to add on

additional 8 presets of control. If desired, up to seven

(7) total AR2000-P units may be added to provide a

total of 64 presets.

-4-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1-8. ELECTRICAL DETAILS.

Termination:

Screw terminals for 13 AWG to

23 AWG conductors.

Voltage Range:

Battery backup:

Selectable 120 VAC

or 240 VAC 50/60 Hz.

24 VDC

Channel A input: Selectable to be 1 Vrms, 25 Vrms,

or 70 Vrms

Channel B input: Selectable to be 1 Vrms, 25 Vrms,

or 70 Vrms

Onboard Amplifier: 15 Watts maximum

Amplifier

Output Voltage:

Selectable to be 1 Vrms, 25 Vrms,

or 70 Vrms

Frequency range: -3dB @ 150 Hz -3dB @ 12 kHz

(no load)

-6dB @ 85 Hz -6dB @ 24.8 kHz

300mW typical @ 1 kHz, 8 ohm

Monitor Speaker

output:

Maximum switching

current for each zone: 15 AMPS

-5-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

II. SPECIFICATIONS.

2-1. AR2000-M POWER INPUT.

Input Voltage

120V,50-60HZ

350 mA

2 A

240 Watts

240V, 50-60HZ

160 mA

Standby Current

Operating Current

Power Consumption

Input Voltage

Standby Current

Operating Current

Power Consumption

1 A

160 Watts

2-2. EMERGENCY POWER SOURCE INPUT.

Input Voltage

Standby Current

Operating Current

24 VDC

650 mA

4 A

2-3. AUDIO INPUT.

A. Local PA (Use optional Model MSB-1 microphone)

Input Impedance

Input Voltage

5k Ohms

16 mVrms (MAX)

B. Channel A / Channel B

Input Impedance

28.87 K ohms @ 1 Vrms position

22.67 K ohms @ 25 Vrms position

22.10 K ohms @ 70 Vrms position

Selectable at 1Vrms, 25Vrms or 70 Vrms

Input Voltage

2-4. AUDIO OUTPUTS.

A. Output Impedance

Balanced Sig. line

27 Ohms

B. Output Voltage Levels no Load

Balanced Signal Line @70Volt position

Balanced Signal Line @25Volt position

Balanced Signal Line @1Volt position

70Vrms

25Vrms

1-20Vrms

2-5. REMOTE PRESET ACTIVATION CIRCUIT.

NOTE: It is recommended that the installer use shielded, twisted pair wire in order to minimize any false

activation due to environmental noise.

Type

Line Impedance

Circuit Current

Dry Contact Closure

1 K ohm (MAX)

20 mA Max (12VDC)

2-6. REMOTE MIC. ACTIVATION CIRCUIT (PTT).

Type

Line Impedance

Circuit Current

Dry Contact Closure

100 Ohm (MAX)

10MA Max (12VDC)

-6-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-7. RELAY CONTACT CLOSURE OUTPUTS.

Relays

Type:

Rating:

Dry Contact Closure

15A maximum current per zone

2-8. FUSE.

Type GMC 2A, 250V

Bussman-type GMT 4A

2-9. PHYSICAL.

A. AR2000-M

Weight

16 lb 8 oz. (7.5 kg.)

Dimensions (HWD)

3.5" x 17 3/8" x 14.25"

89mm x 442mm x 362mm

14GA Aluminum

Case Material

B. AR2000-P

Weight 3 lb, 15 oz. (1.8 kg)

Dimensions (HWD)

1.75" x 17 3/8” x 10.125"

44.5mm x 442mm x 257mm

14GA Aluminum

Case Material

C. AR2000-P

Weight 3 lb, 15 oz. (1.8 kg)

Dimensions (HWD)

1.75" x 17 3/8” x 10.125"

44.5mm x 442mm x 257mm

14GA Aluminum

Case Material

2-10. AGENCY APPROVALS.

A. UL AND cUL Certifications.

UL 813, (AZJX) Commercial Audio and Radio Equipment, Systems and accessories

C22.2 No. 1-98, (AZJX7) Audio, Video, and Similar Electronic Equipment

B. CSA Certification-Pending

C22.2 No. 1-98, Audio, Video, and Similar Electronic Equipment

C. FCC.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

-7-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

III. INSTALLATION.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS

The AR2000-P provides four (4) holes for mount-

ing in a standard rack. It utilizes a space of 1U.

The AR2000-Z provides four (4) holes for mount-

ing in a standard rack. It utilizes a space of 1U.

Peoples lives depend on proper installation of

our products. It is important to follow all instructions

shipped with these products. These devices are to be

installed by a qualified electrician in accordance with

the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70), or other

national or local codes, under the direction of the

local authority having jurisdiction.

3-3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS.

DANGER

To avoid electrical shock and damage to the

device, do not attempt to connect wires when

power is on.

The selection of the mounting location for the

device, its controls and routing of the wiring is to be

accomplished under the direction of the Facilities

Engineer and the Safety Engineer. In addition, listed

below are some other important safety instructions

and precautions you should follow:

Terminal blocks are supplied on the AR2000-M

for field wiring. Strip 1/2" of insulation from the

wiring leads. Attach the appropriate wires to the

corresponding terminals. Tighten the screws to

insure that the wires are firmly held in place. The

terminals will accept conductor sizes 23 AWG to 13

AWG.

•

Read and understand all instructions before

installing or operating this equipment.

Do not connect this unit to the system when

power is on.

3-4. SIGNAL LINES.

Speakers connected to this system can pro-

duce loud sounds which may cause, in certain

situations, permanent hearing loss. You

should take appropriate precautions such as

wearing hearing protection.

A. The signal lines transfer the tone signals

and verbal messages from the AR2000-M to the

selected zones and their devices. In order to reduce

the possibility of cross talk, hum and static noise

pick-up, the signal lines must be twisted pair,

shielded audio cable. Although the majority of sys-

tems use AWG 18 shielded twisted pair audio cables,

the size of the audio cable should be adjusted to

correspond to the level of audio being routed in your

application.

•

After installation, test the Audio Router

sound system to ensure proper operation.

Show these instructions to your Safety

Engineer and then file them in a safe place

and refer to them when maintaining and/or

reinstalling the unit.

CAUTION

•

Establish a procedure to routinely check the

sound system for proper activation and

operation.

If too small a wire gauge is used, unaccept-

able signal voltage drop in the signal line will

cause reduced sound output from the remote

signal device. Only use a cable having wire

gauge greater than 22AWG.

Consult the authority having jurisdiction in

your area regarding the proper use and

installation of this product.

B. Federal does not recommend that new or

existing telephone lines be used as signal lines in an

Audio Router system for the following reasons:

3-1. UNPACKING.

After unpacking the unit, examine it for damage

that may have occurred in transit. If equipment has

been damaged, do not attempt to install or operate it.

File a claim immediately with the carrier stating the

extent of the damage. Carefully check all envelopes,

shipping labels and tags before removing or destroy-

ing them.

1. Interference from other services or

systems, or interference from the system to other

services.

2. Cross talk, interference or hum induced

by other telephone lines.

3. Extended downtime because of the second

party involvement required to service the lines.

4. The additional cost of installation, inter-

facing devices and monthly charges as opposed to a

one-time cost of performing the installation.

3-2. MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS.

The AR2000-M provides four (4) holes for

mounting in a standard rack. It utilizes a space of 2U.

-8-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-5. MODEL AR2000-M SIGNAL

CONNECTIONS.

AR2000-M to the 70 Vrms position. The output audio

must be connected using 16GA wire from AUDIO

OUT to AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP. The

Gain may be adjusted using the AUDIO OUT VOL-

UME control knob.

CAUTION

Crosstalk can occur between signal lines and

power lines, causing confusing messages,

which interfere with the capability of this

equipment.

C. 25 Vrms Signal Line Application.

The AR2000-M has provision for connecting

25 Vrms line operated speakers to its output. Connect

the 25 Vrms line at the terminals of Zone 1 – Zone 8

terminal block(s). Connect the speakers in parallel to

this line using 25 Vrms line tap. This output is

selected by setting the switch on the back of the

AR2000-M to the 25 Vrms position. The output audio

must be connected using 16GA wire from AUDIO

OUT to AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP. The

Gain may be adjusted using the AUDIO OUT VOL-

UME control knob.

Do not install signal lines in the same conduit

with power lines. Avoid routing signal lines on

cable trays with high voltage power lines.

To connect the signal lines of the system to the

AR2000-M, connect a color-coded shielded twisted

pair of audio cables having conductors no smaller

than 18 AWG to + and - of each zone output being

utilized to the appropriate remote device(s). (See

figure 3-1.) Every remote signaling device in the

system will be connected in parallel to these lines.

When connecting the remote devices in parallel to the

signal lines, observe the correct polarity and install

wire nuts over the connections.

D. Low Level Audio Output.

The AR2000-M also has provision for 1 volt

audio output that can be switched to each zone for

individual external amplification. This low level

output is available at the same terminals as in B and

C above. This output is selected by setting the

switch on the back of the AR2000-M to the 1 Vrms

position. The output audio must also be connected

using 18-20GA wire from AUDIO OUT to AUDIO IN

FROM EXTERNAL AMP. The Gain may be adjusted

using the AUDIO OUT VOLUME control knob. It

can also be connected to an analog fiber optic trans-

mitter so that audio can be transmitted over a fiber

optic link in an electrically noisy environment.

NOTE: If using the supplied amplifier or an external

amplifier, the output audio must be connected using

appropriate wire from AUDIO OUT to AUDIO IN

FROM EXTERNAL AMP. If using the on-board

amplifier, directly connect the AUDIO IN FROM

EXTERNAL AMP to the AUDIO OUT terminals on

the back of the AR2000-M. See section 3-4 for recom-

mended wire sizes.

3-6. CONNECTION TO REMOTE DEVICES.

Physically install the remote device(s); follow the

installation instructions packed with the device.

E. External Amplifier Connection for Alternate

Power Audio Output.

A. 300GC, 300GCX, 300X, 302GC, 302GCX,

302X, 50GC, and 50GCB.

The AR2000-M also has provision to connect

an external amplifier, such as the Federal Signal

HP440,to be switched to the corresponding zones.

Set the Audio Router up as listed in D above. Con-

nect the 1 volt AUDIO OUT to the audio input of

another amplifier. The output audio must be con-

nected using appropriate wire gauge for the applica-

tion to the AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP (See

figure 3-2.) The Gain may be adjusted using the

AUDIO OUT VOLUME control knob.

To connect these models to a 25Vrms or

70Vrms signal line, a Model AM25CK or AM70CK

connector card must be used. See figure 3-1 and

instructions below for the appropriate signal line

voltage.

B. 70 Vrms Signal Line Application.

The AR2000-M has provision for connecting

70 Vrms line operated speakers to its output. Connect

the 70 Vrms line at the terminals of Zone 1 – Zone 8

terminal block(s). Connect the speakers in parallel to

this line using 70 Vrms line tap. This output is

selected by setting the switch on the back of the

CAUTION

Careful attention should be paid in order to

make sure orientation of the signal is not

reversed.

-9-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTO

COMMON

MONITOR

(CLASS 2) POWER

OUT TO AR2000-P

CONTROL IN

FROM PRESET

WARNING:^{NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO}

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

+24V

PHONE

VOLUME

MICROPHONE SPEAKER

VOLUME

AUDIO OUT

VOLUME

CH B

VOLUME

CH A

VOLUME

DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.)

GND +24V

POWER OUT

TO PRESET

ABOVE

ALL CALL

AUDIO OUT

SELECT

INPUT CH

INPUT

PHONE LINE

NUMBER

CAUTION: TO REDUCE

THE RISK OF FIRE,

REPLACE ONLY WITH

BUSS 250V, 4A GMT FUSE

SELECT

PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8

PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4

AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP

OR FROM AUDIO OUT 15W

1Vrms

25Vrms

70Vrms

(

)

rms

25V

rms

25V

rms

AUDIO OUT

ALARM

(CLASS 2)

AUDIO OUT

INDICATOR

70V

rms

70V

rms

- +

POWER OUT

TO AR2000-Z

GND +24V

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5

ZONE 6

ZONE 7

ZONE 8

AUDIO OUT(15W) CH

INPUT CH

INPUT

CONTROL OUT

TO ZONE

AUDIO OUT

TO BELOW

(CLASS 2)24VDC

BACKUP POWER

120 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 2A

240 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 1A

SIGNAL LINES

SHIELDED

TWISTED PAIR

SIGNAL LINES

SHIELDED

TWISTED PAIR

300GC

MODEL AR2000-M WITH MODEL 300GC

CONNECTIONS USING INTERNAL AMPLIFIER

AM25CK

HI (+) WHT

LOW (-) WHT

120VAC

290A4120-05B

Figure 3-1.

A. Local Power (see figure 3-3).

3-7. POWER CONNECTIONS.

In this system, power is supplied to the

AR2000-M device by connecting it to a 120VAC or

240VAC supply in the immediate vicinity of the

device. An input selector switch is provided and must

be set to the appropriate input voltage prior to

turning the device on.

The two basic methods of supplying power to an

Audio Router device are 120VAC 50/60Hz Local

Power or 240VAC 50/60Hz Local Power and 24VDC

Backup Power. The following paragraphs describe

each method along with the advantages and disad-

vantages of each.

OPTO

COMMON

MONITOR

(CLASS 2) POWER

CONTROL IN

FROM PRESET

WARNING:^{NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO}

OUT TO AR2000-P

+24V

PHONE

VOLUME

MICROPHONE SPEAKER

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

VOLUME

DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

AUDIO OUT

VOLUME

CH B

VOLUME

CH A

VOLUME

DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.)

GND +24V

POWER OUT

TO PRESET

ABOVE

ALL CALL

AUDIO OUT

SELECT

INPUT CH

INPUT

PHONE LINE

NUMBER

CAUTION: TO REDUCE

THE RISK OF FIRE,

REPLACE ONLY WITH

BUSS 250V, 4A GMT FUSE

SELECT

PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8

AUDIO OUT

PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4

AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP

OR FROM AUDIO OUT 15W

1Vrms

25Vrms

70Vrms

(

)

rms

25V

rms

25V

rms

ALARM

(CLASS 2)

AUDIO OUT

INDICATOR

70V

rms

70V

rms

- +

POWER OUT

TO AR2000-Z

GND +24V

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5

ZONE 6

ZONE 7

ZONE 8

AUDIO OUT(15W) CH

INPUT CH

INPUT

CONTROL OUT

TO ZONE

AUDIO OUT

TO BELOW

(CLASS 2)24VDC

BACKUP POWER

120 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 2A

240 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 1A

SIGNAL LINES

SHIELDED

TWISTED PAIR

300GC

AMP

OUTPUT

AMP

INPUT

HP440

AM25CK

MODEL AR2000-M WITH MODEL 300GC

CONNECTIONS USING EXTERNAL AMPLIFIER

HI (+) WHT

LOW (-) WHT

120VAC

290A4120-06B

Figure 3-2.

-10-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTO

COMMON

MONITOR

(CLASS 2) POWER

OUT TO AR2000-P

CONTROL IN

FROM PRESET

WARNING:^{NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO}

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

+24V

PHONE

VOLUME

MICROPHONE SPEAKER

VOLUME

AUDIO OUT

VOLUME

CH B

VOLUME

CH A

VOLUME

DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.)

GND +24V

POWER OUT

TO PRESET

ABOVE

ALL CALL

AUDIO OUT

SELECT

INPUT CH

INPUT

PHONE LINE

NUMBER

CAUTION: TO REDUCE

THE RISK OF FIRE,

REPLACE ONLY WITH

BUSS 250V, 4A GMT FUSE

SELECT

PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8

PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4

AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP

OR FROM AUDIO OUT 15W

1Vrms

25Vrms

70Vrms

(

)

rms

25V

rms

25V

rms

AUDIO OUT

ALARM

(CLASS 2)

AUDIO OUT

INDICATOR

70V

rms

70V

rms

- +

POWER OUT

TO AR2000-Z

GND +24V

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5

ZONE 6

ZONE 7

ZONE 8

AUDIO OUT(15W) CH

INPUT CH

INPUT

CONTROL OUT

TO ZONE

AUDIO OUT

TO BELOW

(CLASS 2)24VDC

120 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 2A

240 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 1A

BACKUP POWER

PS600

24VDC

BACKUP POWER

TO 120VAC

290A4120-07B

Figure 3-3.

power the local Audio Router Device. If the PS600 is

used, it is not necessary to switch the power source if

a power failure occurs.

CAUTION

Improper installation could render this

system inoperable, interfering with the

indicating nature of this product. The instal-

lation must conform to applicable local and/or

National Electrical codes.

3. Disadvantages of Backup Power System.

a. A separate power source for all

remote devices is required. Heavy power lines are

required from that power source to the remote

devices in the system. The size of the power lines is

dependent upon the number of amplifiers and the

total distance of the power loop in order to minimize

the voltage drop while a signal is being routed.

If an emergency power source is required, a

backup power system described below should be

employed.

WARNING

b. Future expansion is limited by the

current capacity of the power source and the power

lines that were initially installed.

If the AR2000-M is to be connected to a non-

power limited 24 volt dc supply, the National

Electrical Code (NFPA70) requires that those

leads be separated from other classes of

wiring connected to this unit.

c. Central power installations must

comply with local electrical codes. Most power cir-

cuits are Class I circuits. Therefore, conduit will

probably be required. Installation costs are higher

than a local power system.

B. Backup Power (See figure 3-3).

1. General.

C. AR2000-M System Power Connections.

In the backup power system all of the

local power lines are connected in parallel to one

centrally located power source of 24VDC.

DANGER

Installation with the system power on could

cause serious injury or death. Do not perform

any installation or maintenance on this

system when power is on. Ensure that the

power is disconnected before proceeding.

2. Advantages of the Backup Power System.

a. The entire system may be indepen-

dent of local line voltage.

b. The entire system can be switched to

an emergency standby power source in the event of a

power failure.

WARNING

This device is to be installed by a trained

electrician who is thoroughly familiar with

the national electrical code (NFPA 70) and

local codes and will follow the guidelines.

c. The central power system has the

added advantage that an auxiliary power supply,

such as the Federal Model PS600 can be used to

-11-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

3-8. CONNECTIONS TO REMOTE SWITCHES.

If this unit is to be connected to a non-power

limited 24 volt dc supply, the National Electri-

cal Code (NFPA70) requires that those leads

be separated from other classes of wiring

connected to this unit.

The AR2000-M presets can be activated re-

motely by any normally open low current switch

contacts having a current capacity of at least 50 mA

inductive. Figure 3-6 illustrates the connection of

switch contacts to the AR2000-M. S1, S2, S3 and S4

represents remote switch contacts such as those

found in flow switches, program clocks, heat detec-

tors, and smoke detectors. The remotely activated

presets function as long as the activating contacts

remain closed. A jumper needs to be placed across

OPTO COMMON and the provided +24V terminal

next to it on the back of the AR2000-M in order for

the remotely activated presets to function. A remote

switch may be connected to the ALL CALL position if

desired. These are all Normally Open contacts that

initiate with contact closure and remain active until

the contact is opened again.

CAUTION

Cross talk, interference, or hum can be

induced in signal lines, causing poor audio

output or confusing messages, which inter-

feres with the capability of this equipment.

Do not install power lines in the same conduit

as signal lines.

Operating power is connected to AR2000-M

by merely inserting the plug end of the line cord into

any standard 120 volt, 60 Hz outlet. The AR2000-M is

factory set for 120VAC 50/60Hz operation. If 240 volt

operation is preferred, the input block provides a

switch that must be set to this position in order to

function at 240 VAC operation.

3-9. INPUT SOURCE CONNECTIONS.

WARNING

If it is desired to use 24 VDC either as a

primary or auxiliary source of power, connect the “+”

terminal of 24 volt DC power supply to the “+”

terminal at the 24VDC BACKUP POWER terminal

on the AR2000-M and “-” terminal of the 24 VDC

power supply to the “-“ terminal at the 24VDC

BACKUP POWER terminal on the AR2000-M located

in the back of the device. (See figure 3-3.)

Installation or maintenance on AR2000-M

when power is on can result in serious injury

or death. Do not perform any installation or

maintenance to the system when power is on.

Set selector for CH A to the appropriate input

voltage, 1Vrms, 25Vrms or 70Vrms. Connect the “+”

of the source device to the “+” terminal at the Chan-

nel A input. Connect the “-“ of the source device to

the “-“ terminal at the Channel A input. Repeat this

process for the Channel B input. CH A and CH B

volume controls are available just above each input

selector to allow the input gain to be adjusted.

D. AR2000-P and AR2000-Z Power Connections.

Operating power is connected to AR2000-P

and AR2000-Z by merely connecting 24 VDC from the

AR2000-M to each unit. A terminal block is provided

at the rear-left side of each unit for power connection.

Observe and maintain proper polarity when wiring

the power to these units. Connect the “+” terminal of

the AR2000-M to the “+” terminal of the AR2000-P at

the “+” terminal located in the back of device. Con-

nect the “-” terminal of the AR2000-M to the “-”

terminal of the AR2000-P at the “-” terminal located

in the back of device. An additional 24VDC power

outlet is provided on each AR2000-P and AR2000-Z

for daisy-chaining the power to each sub-unit. Re-

peat for each AR2000-P and AR2000-Z.

CAUTION

Be certain to set the input selector switch to

the appropriate input voltage to avoid dam-

age to the unit and the device being con-

nected.

3-10. COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS for

AR2000-P and AR2000-Z.

WARNING

Setup for the AR2000-P presets is done in the

same way as the AR2000-M presets. (See figure 3-4.)

It is important that the communication lines

be properly connected to their respective

communication port. Failure to connect the

cables properly will damage the devices and

possibly render them inoperable.

Setup for the AR2000-Z zones is done in the

same way as the AR2000-M. An audio input is

provided on each unit to be routed to each of the

zones it selects. This audio should be connected by

wiring a connection from the master audio output to

the provided input terminals. (See figure 3-5.) Each

additional AR2000-Z should obtain audio in the same

manner from the unit above. (See figure 3-5.)

The label on the back of each device indicates

where the communication cable link should be

connected. See figure 3-6 for appropriate placement.

-12-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(CLASS 2) POWER OUT

TO AR2000-P

OPTO COMMON +24V

WARNING:^{NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE}

THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION

BEFORE

INSTALLATION

DISCONNECT

POWER

THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES,

OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:

CONTROL IN

FROM PRESET

ABOVE

(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND

(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED,

INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.

DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.)

GND +24V

AR2000-M OR AR2000-P

PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3

PRESET 4

PRESET 5

PRESET 6

PRESET 7

PRESET 8

NOT USED

CONTROL OUT

TO PRESET

BELOW

WARNING

CONNECT CABLES

TO PROPER

JACK

AR2000-P

SHIELD

TWISTED

PAIR

SHIELD

TWISTED

PAIR

SHIELD

TWISTED

PAIR

SHIELD

TWISTED

PAIR

SHIELD

TWISTED

PAIR

SHIELD

TWISTED

PAIR

SHIELD

TWISTED

PAIR

SHIELD

TWISTED

PAIR

INSTALL JUMPER WIRE

18 GA, 3" TO 4" LONG

NORMALLY

OPEN

CONTACTS

REMOTE

SWITCH

DEVICE

NORMALLY NORMALLY

OPEN OPEN

CONTACTS CONTACTS

NORMALLY

OPEN

CONTACTS

REMOTE

SWITCH

DEVICE

NORMALLY

OPEN

CONTACTS

REMOTE

SWITCH

DEVICE

NORMALLY

OPEN

CONTACTS

REMOTE

SWITCH

DEVICE

NORMALLY

OPEN

CONTACTS

REMOTE

SWITCH

DEVICE

NORMALLY

OPEN

CONTACTS

REMOTE

SWITCH

DEVICE

24VDC

FROM

AR2000-M

REMOTE

SWITCH

DEVICE

REMOTE

SWITCH

DEVICE

MODULAR CABLE

FROM AR2000-M

AR2000-P

TYPICAL REMOTE PRESET CONFIGURATION

EXAMPLE OF REMOTE SWITCHES MAY INCLUDE SENSORS,

DOOR TRIGGER SWITCHES, PANEL SWITCHES, OR OTHER

290A4120-08B

Figure 3-4.

Decide which channel will get the CD player

A. Connecting a Model AR2000-Z.

connected to it. Using CH A as an example, set the

voltage selector for the Ch A input to the 1 Vrms

position. Connect the “+” input of CH A to the “+”

output of the CD player. Connect the “-” input of CH

A to the “-” output of the CD player. (See figure 3-7.)

An input level adjust exists just above the input

selector switch for each input channel. Adjust the

input level as needed.

Using the provided 8 position modular cable,

connect the bottom communication port of the

AR2000-M to the top port of the AR2000-Z. (See

section 3-7 part D for an explanation of the power

connection to this unit.)

B. Connecting a Model AR2000-P.

Using the provided 8-position modular cable,

connect the top communication port of the AR2000-M

to the bottom port of the AR2000-P. (Refer to para-

graph 3-7.D. for an explanation of the power connec-

tion to this unit.)

B. Connecting a 300VSC-1044-1 or 300MB to the

Audio Router.

Disconnect power from the AR2000-M.

Connect the output of either device to the CH B input

in the same manner as detailed for the CD player. Be

sure to set the input voltage selector to the appropri-

ate voltage. (See figure 3-7.)

3-11. TYPICAL CONNECTION EXAMPLES

A. Connecting a CD Player to the Audio Router.

Disconnect power from the AR2000-M.

WARNING:^{NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE}

(CLASS 2) POWER IN FROM

THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

AR2000-M OR AR2000-Z

AUDIO IN

CAUTION

THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES,

OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:

(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND

(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED,

CONTROL IN

FROM ZONE

ABOVE

BEFORE

INSTALLATION

DISCONNECT

POWER

INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.

AUDIO OUT

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5

ZONE 6

ZONE 7 ZONE 8

GND +24V

OUT TO AR2000-Z

AUDIO OUT

CONTROL OUT

TO ZONE

BELOW

WARNING

CONNECT CABLES

TO PROPER

JACK

AR2000-Z

SHIELD TWISTED

PAIR FROM

AR2000-M AUDIO

SHIELD

TWISTED

PAIR

MODULAR CABLE

FROM AR2000-M

SHIELD

TWISTED

PAIR

24VDC

FROM

300GC

AR2000-M

AR2000-Z

TYPICAL ZONE CONFIGURATION

AM25CK

120VAC

290A4120-09B

Figure 3-5.

-13-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

( C L A S S 2 ) P O W E R I N F R O M

( C L A S S 2 ) P O W E R

R E P L A C E O N L Y W I T H G M C 2 A , 2 5 0 V F U S E

C A U T I O N : T O R E D U C E T H E R I S K O F F I R E ,

Figure 3-6.

-14-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTO

COMMON

MONITOR

(CLASS 2) POWER

OUT TO AR2000-P

CONTROL IN

FROM PRESET

WARNING:^{NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO}

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

+24V

PHONE

VOLUME

MICROPHONE SPEAKER

VOLUME

AUDIO OUT

VOLUME

CH B

VOLUME

CH A

VOLUME

DRY CONTACT IN (N.O.)

GND +24V

POWER OUT

TO PRESET

ABOVE

ALL CALL

AUDIO OUT

SELECT

INPUT CH

INPUT

PHONE LINE

NUMBER

CAUTION: TO REDUCE

THE RISK OF FIRE,

REPLACE ONLY WITH

BUSS 250V, 4A GMT FUSE

SELECT

PRESET 5 PRESET 6 PRESET 7 PRESET 8

PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4

AUDIO IN FROM EXTERNAL AMP

OR FROM AUDIO OUT 15W

1Vrms

25Vrms

70Vrms

(

)

rms

25V

rms

25V

rms

AUDIO OUT

ALARM

(CLASS 2)

AUDIO OUT

INDICATOR

70V

rms

70V

rms

- +

POWER OUT

TO AR2000-Z

GND +24V

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5

ZONE 6

ZONE 7

ZONE 8

AUDIO OUT(15W) CH

INPUT CH

INPUT

CONTROL OUT

TO ZONE

AUDIO OUT

TO BELOW

(CLASS 2)24VDC

BACKUP POWER

120 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 2A

240 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 1A

RIGHT

LEFT

CD PLAYER

SIGNAL LINES SHIELDED

TWISTED PAIR

GROUND

120VAC

SPLIT OR CONNECT TO

ONLY LEFT OR RIGHT CHANNEL

300MB

TYPICAL CONNECTION

CD PLAYER AND MODEL 300MB

SIGNAL

SIGNAL LINES SHIELDED

TWISTED PAIR

GAIN

CENTER 17

+ -

14 13

TB-2

TB-1

120VAC

290A4120-10B

Figure 3-7.

IV. TESTING/OPERATING.

WARNING

4-1. After completion of installation be sure to test

the system to verify that each unit operates satisfac-

torily.

Failure to follow all safety precautions and

instructions may result in property damage,

serious injury, or possible death to you or

others.

4-2. Provide a copy of these instructions for the

Safety Engineer(s), System Operators(s) and Mainte-

nance personal.

WARNING

4-3. TELEPHONE FUNCTION COMMANDS.

Under certain conditions these devices are

capable of transferring sound loud enough to

cause hearing damage. Adequate hearing

protection should be worn if standing within

close proximity to the device while testing.

Recommendations in OSHA Sound Level

Standard (29CFR 1910) should not be ex-

ceeded.

A. Changing the Password.

When the line attached to the Router is

called, the Router will answer with the message

“ENTER PASSWORD”. Enter your 8 digit password.

Then the caller will hear the message

“PRESS 9 KEY TO CHANGE THE PASSWORD OR

6 KEY TO RECORD A MESSAGE”.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS

Although your Multiplexing system is operat-

ing properly it may not be completely effec-

tive. People may not hear or heed your

messages. You must recognize this fact and

ensure that your messages achieve their

intended effect through proper test and

training sequences suitable for your specific

application(s).

Press the 9 key, the message “ENTER NEW

PASSWORD” will inform the caller to enter a new

password. The same new password must be entered

twice. The caller will hear the message “PASSWORD

CHANGED” then the message “GOODBYE” and the

system hangs up the phone line.

The password can be returned to the default

“12345678” by opening the cover of the Router and

-15-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

setting switch SW1 to position #4 to the “ON” posi-

tion for 5 seconds with the power “ON”.

message will be sent to Zones 1, 4 and 6 of the Master

unit (Bank 1).

B. Recording a Message for Broadcast.

For example: If there is one AR2000-Z unit

connected to the AR2000-M, then it is on Bank 2. To

send a message to only Zone 4 of the AR2000-Z in

Bank 2, key in the following after recording a mes-

sage: key in [*], [2], [4], and then press the [#] key

and hang up. The message will be sent only to Zone 4

of Bank 2.

When the line attached to the Router is

called, the Router will answer with the message

“ENTER PASSWORD”. Enter your 8 digit password.

Then the caller will hear the message

“PRESS 9 KEY TO CHANGE THE PASSWORD OR

6 KEY TO RECORD A MESSAGE”.

For example: If there are two AR2000-Z units

connected to the AR2000-M, then they are on Bank 2

and on Bank 3. To send a message to Zone 4 of the

AR2000-Z in Bank 2 and Zone 5 of the AR2000-Z in

Bank 3, key in the following after recording a mes-

sage: key in [*], [2], [4] and key in [*], [3], [5] and then

press the [#] key and hang up. The message will be

sent to Zone 4 of Bank 2 and Zone 5 of Bank 3.

Press the 6 key, the message “RECORD

MESSAGE, PRESS # KEY TO BROADCAST YOUR

MESSAGE” prompts the caller to start speaking. Say

your message into the phone. Press [#] and hang up

the phone. Your message will be sent to all zones

connected to the Audio Router Device. The message

can be up to 90 seconds long. If the user exceeds 90

second duration, the message will not play back. This

is the procedure for selecting “All Call”.

For example: To send a message to Zone 6

from Bank 8 after recording a message, key in [*], [8],

[6] and then press the [#] key and hang up. The

message will be sent to Zone 6 of Bank 8.

C. Abort a Message Without Sending it

Anywhere.

Hang up at any time without pressing [#].

For example: To select Zones 1,3,5 from Bank

2 and Zones 1, 2 from Bank 3, key in the following

after recording a message: key in [*], [2 ], [1], [3], [5],

[*], [3], [1], [2], [#] and hang up. The message will be

sent to Zones 1, 3 and 5 of Bank 2 and Zones 1 and 2

of Bank 3.

D. Send Your Message to a Specific Selected Zone

or Zones.

After saying the message, press any keys on

the telephone keypad from 1-8. These correspond to

the eight zones which are connected to the master

AR2000-M unit. Pressing [1] will select Zone 1,

pressing [5] will select Zone 5 and pressing [8] will

select Zone 8.

E. Send Your Message to a Selected Preset.

After recording a message, first key in [0 ],

then the associated Bank number(1-8) and then the

Preset number of that Bank (1-8). The zero indicates

you are about to select a preset Bank and preset

number. Only one preset may be selected for a

message.

For example: To send a message to only Zone

3 of the AR2000-M, after recording the message key

in [3] and then press the [#] key. The message will be

sent only to Zone 3.

For example: To send a message to Zone 3

and Zone 4 of the AR2000-M, after recording the

message key in [3], key in [4] and then press the [#]

key. The message will be sent to Zone 3 and to Zone

If additional AR2000-P units are connected,

those Presets may also be individually selected. To

accomplish this, first key in [0], then key in the Bank

number which is associated with the additional

Preset you desire to reference (2 –8) and then key in

a Preset for that bank. A maximum of seven (7)

additional Preset Banks may be added to the

AR2000-M device. The master unit is designated as

Bank 1.

If additional AR2000-Z units are connected,

those Zones may also be individually selected. To

accomplish this first key in [*], then key in the bank

number which is associated with the additional zones

you desire to reference (2 –8) and then key in a Zone

for that bank. A maximum of seven (7) additional

Zone Banks may be added to the AR2000-M device.

The master unit is designated as Bank 1.

To select preset 2 from Bank 2 after recording

a message, key in [0], [2], [2] and then press the [#]

key and hang up. The message will be sent to Preset

2 of Bank 2.

For example: Keying in [*], [1], [2] will select

to send your message to zone 2 of Bank 1 (located in

the master unit). The [*] says you are about to select

a Bank number and Zone. To send the message to

Bank 1 Zones 1, 4, and 6, after recording a message

key in [*], [1], [1], [4], [6], [# ] and hang up. The

To select Preset 3 from Bank 8 after record-

ing a message, key in [0], [8], [3] and then press the

[#] key and hang up. The message will be sent to

Preset 3 of Bank 8.

-16-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Telephone operation is essentially independent

of other operations except when the device plays its

recorded message. Whatever modes were active

before phone operation will return when the phone

message is complete. In the event that the unit is

stuck in playback mode and needs to be disconnected,

press and hold the “All call” button for 1 second to

force a disconnect.

VI. SERVICE.

The factory will provide technical assistance

with any problem that cannot be handled locally with

satisfaction. Please call customer service for assis-

tance (708) 534-3400.

Communication and shipments should be

addressed to:

V. MAINTENANCE

Federal Signal Corporation

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, Il

SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE

PERSONNEL

Failure to follow all the safety precautions and

instructions may result in property damage, serious

injury, or death to you or others.

60466-3195

•

Read and understand all instructions before

performing maintenance on this unit.

Do not perform maintenance on this unit

when the circuit is energized.

Periodic checks should be made to ensure that

effectiveness of this device has not been

reduced.

•

Any maintenance to this unit MUST be

performed by a trained electrician in accor-

dance with the National Electrical Code

(NFPA 70) or other national or local codes.

•

Never alter this unit in any manner. Safety

may be jeopardized if alterations are made to

this device.

The nameplates, which may contain caution-

ary or other information of importance to

maintenance personnel, should not be ob-

scured by painting or anything of the like.

WARNING

Unauthorized servicing of this unit may

result in diminished performance and/or

property damage, serious injury, or death to

you or others. If a malfunctioning unit is

encountered, do not attempt any field repair

or retro fit of parts. Refer to paragraph VI.

SERVICE for instructions regarding return/

repair of the unit.

-17-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODELS AMR6-2570 AND AMR6-100

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODELS AMR6-2570

AND AMR6-100 ADJUSTABLE POWER LOUDSPEAKERS

MODELOS AMR6-2570 Y AMR6-100

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN PARA PARLANTES DE

POTENCIA AJUSTABLE MODELOS AMR6-2570 Y AMR6-100

MODÈLES AMR6-2570 ET AMR6-100

INSTRUCTIONS D'INSTALLATION POUR LES MODÈLES

AMR6-2570 ET AMR6-100 DE HAUT-PARLEURS RÉGLABLES

Address all communications and shipments to:

Adressez toutes les communications et expéditions à :

Dirija toda la correspondencia y envíos a:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODELS AMR6-2570 AND AMR6-100

ADJUSTABLE POWER LOUDSPEAKERS

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage,

serious injury, or death to you or others.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS

Peoples lives depend on your safe installation of our products. It is important to follow all

instructions shipped with the products. This device is to be installed by a trained electrician who is

thoroughly familiar with the National Electric Code and will follow the NEC guidelines as well as

local codes.

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and routing of the wiring is to

be accomplished under the direction of the Facilities Engineer and the Safety Engineer. In addition,

listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:

•

This unit should be installed by a qualified electrician in accordance with NFPA 72,

and national and local Electrical and Fire Codes, under the direction of the

authority having jurisdiction.

•

If the unit is not installed in a supervisory system, it must be tested at regular

intervals. Refer to NFPA 72 and the local Fire Codes for this information.

•

Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.

Do not connect this unit to the system when power is on.

All quality speakers of this size and type are capable of producing loud sounds

which may cause, in certain situations, permanent hearing loss. You should take

appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing protection.

•

After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper operation.

All quality speakers of this size and type are capable of producing loud sounds,

which may cause, in certain situations, permanent hearing loss. The device should

be installed far enough away from potential listeners to limit their exposure while

still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal Regulations 1910.95

Noise Standard provides guidelines, which may be used regarding permissible

noise exposure levels.

•

Show these instructions to your Safety Engineer and then file them in a safe place

and refer to them when maintaining and/or reinstalling the unit.

Establish a procedure to routinely check the sound system for proper activation

and operation.

Consult the authority having jurisdiction in your area regarding the proper use

and installation of this product.

A. GENERAL.

The Model AMR6-2570 loudspeaker is Underwriters Laboratories Listed for “Fire Protective

Signaling Use” (category designations UUMW, UEAY, and UEAY7) and the Model AMR6-100 is

Listed for “General Signaling Use” (category designations UEAY, and UEAY7). Both loudspeaker

models are UL listed for use in return air ceiling plenum spaces.

The 25/70 volt model includes an in-line capacitor to provide the isolation necessary for

supervisory use. The 25/ 70 volt model is designed to reproduce electronically generated warning

tones that command rapid recognition of emergency alerting signals. In addition, both loudspeaker

models can reproduce tones, full range voice communication and background music.

-1-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B. POWER ADJUSTMENT.

See figures 1 and 2. Multiple power settings are achieved via selection of transformer tabs. The

unit is set at the factory to the 8-watt position. To adjust the power (volume), remove the receptacle/

wire assembly for power setting and place it on the transformer tab corresponding to the desired

power (see table 1). Ensure that the receptacle is fully seated on the tab.

C. SPECIFICATIONS.

The AMR6-2570 and AMR6-100 are high fidelity 6.5" 2-way speakers, incorporating a 14mm

hard dome, neodymium tweeter.

Frequency response rating

Maximum Supervisory Voltage

UL Audibility Rating

Audibility Ratings On Axis

@ 10", 8-watt tap

110 Hz - 20,000 Hz

100Vdc

See Table 1

Model AMR6-2570

Model AMR6-100

81 dBa, 25 volt tap, 85.0 dBa, 70 volt tap

85.0 dBa

Weight

Construction

3 pounds

ABS Frame - UL VO, 5VA Flame Class

White Powder Coated Steel Grille

D. INSTALLATION.

To avoid electrical shock, do not attempt to install wires when power is on.

1. Electrical Connections.

FOR SUPERVISED SYSTEMS

An uninsulated section of a single conductor must NOT be looped around a terminal and

used as two separate connections. The wire must be severed to provide electrical

supervision of the connection.

Use 2 x 14-18 AWG wiring for speaker models.

Strip 1/4" of insulation from all wiring leads. Attach the appropriate wires to the correspond-

ing terminals on the back of the speaker as shown in figures 1, 2, and 3. The positive or “+” terminal

is marked with a red screw head. Tighten the screws to ensure that the wires are firmly held in

place.

To select the desired wattage, refer to paragraph B. and see figures 1 and 2. Move the

receptacle-wire assembly to set the desired output level. See table 1.

The 25/70 volt model is factory configured for 70 Vrms operation. For 25 Vrms operation

remove the supplied receptacle/wire assembly and place it on the 25V tab (see figure 1). The 100

volt model is factory configured for 100 volt operation and no user connections are required.

2. Mounting (see figure 4).

Both loudspeaker models are mounted using the R6BB back box and R6TB support bridge.

These loudspeakers can easily be mounted to any surface thickness between 1/4" and 1-1/2" due to

the unique adjustable “L” shaped clamps (see figure 4). Mounting of this product using the Model

R6BB back box and Model R6TB support bridge into a ceiling tile is accomplished as follows:

a. Remove the ceiling tile and cut a hole using the enclosed template or using the Model

R6TB support bridge as a template.

b. Bend up the four horseshoe tabs on the bridge (see figure 4).

c. Replace the tile and push back an adjacent tile.

-2-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

d. Position the support bridge through the adjacent tile opening and secure it over the tile

just cut.

e. Place the back box onto the support bridge ensuring that the four tabs in the bridge

locate into the corresponding slots on the back box (see figure 4).

f. Using pliers, turn the top section of the four tabs 1/8 turn in either direction to secure the

back box to the support bridge.

g. Install the wiring into the back box ensuring that all applicable codes are met.

h. Replace the adjacent tile, connect the wiring to the speaker (see figures 1 and 2), and

secure the speaker using the adjustable “L’ shaped clamps.

E. TESTING/OPERATING.

Under certain conditions these devices are capable of producing sounds loud enough to

cause hearing damage. Adequate hearing protection should be worn if standing within

close proximity to the device while testing. Recommendations in the OSHA Sound Level

Standard (29 CFR 1910) should not be exceeded.

1. After installation is complete, be sure to test the system to verify that each speaker operates

satisfactorily. If it is found that the volume is too low for its location, a higher wattage tap may be

selected. Carefully remove the speaker and move the receptacle to a higher wattage tap (see figures

1 and 2). Reinstall the speaker and retest.

2. After completion of initial system test, establish a program for periodic testing of this device.

Refer to NFPA 72, local Fire Codes and the authority having jurisdiction for

this information.

3. Provide a copy of these instructions for the Safety Engineer, system operator(s) and

maintenance personnel.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS

(Regarding the 25/70 volt model)

Even if your warning system is operating properly, it may not be completely effective.

People may not see, hear or heed your warning signal. You must recognize this fact and

ensure that your warning signal achieves its intended effect through proper testing/

training sequences within your specific application(s), or other appropriate actions.

F. MAINTENANCE.

If cleaning of the front face of this device is required, a mild soap solution is recommended as the

cleaning agent.

NOTE

Although not advised, if painting/touch-up of the grille model’s vinyl face is necessary, a

vinyl-based paint is required for coverage.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions in this document may result in

property damage, serious injury, or death to you or others.

•

Read and understand all instructions before performing maintenance on this unit.

Periodic checks should be made to ensure that effectiveness of this device has not

been reduced because the speaker has become clogged with a foreign substance or

because objects have been placed in front of the speaker.

•

Any maintenance to this unit MUST be performed by a trained electrician in

accordance with NEC guidelines and local codes.

Never alter this unit in any manner.

-3-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Periodically check this device to verify that there are no foreign substances in, or in front of,

the speaker which will reduce its effectiveness.

2. Testing should be periodically performed. Refer to NFPA 72, local Fire Codes and the

authority having jurisdiction for this information.

3. In the event a volume adjustment or other repair is required, be sure to refer to the Safety

Message To Maintenance Personnel before proceeding.

G. SERVICE.

Unauthorized repair/servicing of the unit may result in degradation of performance and/

or property damage, serious injury, or death to you or others. If a malfunctioning unit is

encountered, do not attempt any field repair/retrofit of parts.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems

that cannot be handled locally.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair, must be accompanied by a

Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A. can be obtained from the local Distributor or

Manufacturer’s Representative.

At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction, should

be given.

Address all communications and shipments to:

Federal Signal Corporation

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-4-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN PARA PARLANTES DE POTENCIA

AJUSTABLE MODELOS AMR6-2570 Y AMR6-100

El incumplimiento de todas las instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad puede dar

como resultado daño a la propiedad, lesiones graves o la muerte para usted u otros.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA LOS INSTALADORES

Las vidas de las personas dependen de que usted instale con seguridad nuestros productos. Es

importante seguir todas las instrucciones que se envían con los productos. Este dispositivo debe

ser instalado por un electricista capacitado que esté totalmente familiarizado con el Código

nacional de electricidad y que cumpla tanto con las normas NEC como con los códigos locales.

La elección del sitio de montaje del dispositivo, sus controles y la ruta del cableado debe

realizarse bajo la dirección del ingeniero de la instalación y del ingeniero de seguridad. Además, a

continuación se detallan otras importantes instrucciones y precauciones sobre la seguridad que

usted debe cumplir:

•

Esta unidad debe ser instalada por un electricista calificado de acuerdo con NFPA

72, y con los Códigos locales de electricidad e incendio, bajo la dirección de la

autoridad que tenga jurisdicción.

Si la unidad no se instala en un sistema de supervisión, debe ser probada a

intervalos regulares. Consulte el NFPA 72 y los Códigos locales sobre incendios

por esta información.

Lea y entienda todas las instrucciones antes de instalar o de hacer funcionar este

equipo.

•

No conecte esta unidad al sistema mientras la corriente está encendida.

Todos los parlantes de calidad de este tipo y tamaño son capaces de producir

sonidos fuertes que pueden causar, en ciertas situaciones, sordera permanente.

Debe tomar las precauciones adecuadas como por ejemplo usar protección para

los oídos.

•

Luego de la instalación, pruebe el sistema de sonido para asegurar un

funcionamiento adecuado.

Todos los parlantes de calidad de este tipo y tamaño son capaces de producir

sonidos fuertes que pueden causar, en ciertas situaciones, sordera permanente. El

dispositivo debe instalarse lo suficientemente alejado de escuchas potenciales

para limitar su exposición mientras continúa manteniendo su efectividad. El

Código OSHA de regulaciones federales 1910.95 Estándar de ruido proporciona

normas, que pueden usarse con referencia a los niveles permitidos de exposición

al ruido.

•

Muestre estas instrucciones a su ingeniero de seguridad y luego guárdelas en un

lugar seguro y remítase a ellas cuando realice el mantenimiento y/o reinstale la

unidad.

•

Establezca un procedimiento para revisar rutinariamente la instalación del

sistema de sonido para verificar su activación y funcionamiento adecuado.

Consulte con la autoridad que tenga jurisdicción en su área con respecto al uso y

la instalación adecuada de este producto.

A. GENERAL.

El altavoz modelo AMR6-2570 está certificado por Underwriters Laboratories para el “Uso en la

señalización de protección contra incendio” (denominación de tipo UUMW, UEAY y UEAY7) y el

modelo AMR6-100 está certificado para “Uso de señalización general” (denominación de tipo UEAY

y UEAY7). Ambos modelos de altavoz están certificados por UL para uso en espacios plenos de

cielorrasos de aire de retorno.

El modelo de 25/70 voltios incluye un condensador en línea para proporcionar el aislamiento

necesario para uso de supervisión. El modelo de 25/70 voltios está diseñado para reproducir

-5-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

tonos de advertencia generados electrónicamente que comandan un reconocimiento rápido de las

señales de alerta de emergencia. Además, ambos modelos de parlantes pueden reproducir tonos,

comunicación de voz de alcance total y música de fondo.

B. AJUSTE DE POTENCIA.

Ver figuras 1 y 2. A través de la selección de las lengüetas del transformador se pueden

obtener múltiples valores de potencia. En la fábrica la unidad se ajusta en la posición de 8 vatios.

Para ajustar la potencia (volumen), quite el ensamblaje del receptáculo/cable para ajustar la

potencia y colóquelos en la lengüeta correspondiente del transformador a la potencia deseada

(ver tabla 1). Asegúrese de que el receptáculo esté totalmente apoyado en la lengüeta.

C. ESPECIFICACIONES.

El AMR6-2570 y el AMR6-100 son parlantes de alta fidelidad de 2 vías de 6,5”, e incorporan

un altavoz de alta frecuencia de neodimio, de domo rígido de 14 mm.

Clasificación de respuesta de frecuencia

Máximo voltaje de supervisión

Capacidad de audibilidad UL

Clasificaciones de audibilidad en

el eje @ 10", derivación de 8 vatios

Modelo AMR6-2570

110 Hz - 20,000 Hz

100VCC

Vea la Tabla 1

81 dBa, derivación de 25 volt, 85.0 dBa, derivación de 70 volt

85.0 dBa

Modelo AMR6-100

Peso

Estructura

3 libras

Marco ABS - Clase UL “Flame” (llama) 5VA, VO

Rejilla de acero cubierto de polvo blanco

D. INSTALACIÓN.

Para evitar un choque eléctrico, no intente instalar cables cuando está encendido.

1. Conexiones eléctricas.

PARA SISTEMAS SUPERVISADOS

Una sección no aislada de un único conductor NO debe ser enlazada alrededor de un

terminal y utilizada como dos conexiones separadas. El cable debe ser dividido para

proporcionar supervisión eléctrica de la conexión.

Para los modelos de parlantes utilice un cableado de 2 x 12-18 AWG.

Pele 1/4" de aislamiento de todos los conductores del cableado. Conecte loe alambres

apropiados a los terminales correspondientes en la parte posterior del altavoz tal como se muestra

en las figuras 1, 2 y 3. El terminal positivo o “+” está marcado con una cabeza roja de tornillo.

Apriete los tornillos para asegurar que los alambres estén firmemente colocados en su posición.

Para seleccionar la potencia deseada, consulte el párrafo B y vea las figuras 1 y 2. Mueva el

conjunto receptáculo-alambre para fijar el nivel de salida deseado. Vea la tabla 1.

El modelo de 25/70 voltios viene configurado de fábrica para un funcionamiento de 70

Vrms. Para un funcionamiento de 25 Vrms quite el ensamblaje receptáculo/cable que se

proporciona y colóquelo en la pestaña de 25 voltios (vea la figura 2). El modelo de 100 voltios está

configurado de fábrica para funcionar a 100 voltios y no se necesita realizar ninguna conexión por

parte del usuario.

2. Montaje (ver figura 4).

Ambos modelos de parlantes se arman utilizando una caja trasera R6BB y un puente de

soporte R6TB. Estos parlantes pueden ser armados fácilmente sobre una superficie de cualquier

espesor entre 1/4” y 1-1/2” gracias a las exclusivas grapas ajustables en forma de “L” (ver figura

-6-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4). El armado de este producto utilizando la caja trasera modelo R6BB y el puente de apoyo

modelo R6TB en una tablilla del cielorraso se logra de la siguiente forma:

a. Quite la tablilla del cielorraso y corte un orificio utilizando la plantilla que se adjunta o el

puente de apoyo modelo R6TB como plantilla.

b. Doble hacia arriba las cuatro pestañas en herradura del puente (ver figura 4).

c. Vuelva a colocar la tablilla y empuje hacia atrás una tablilla contigua.

d. Coloque el puente de apoyo a través de la abertura de la tablilla contigua y asegúrelo

sobre la tablilla recién cortada.

e. Coloque la caja trasera sobre el puente de apoyo asegurándose de que las cuatro

pestañas del puente queden dentro de las ranuras correspondientes en la caja trasera (ver figura 4).

f. Utilizando pinzas, doble la sección superior de las cuatro pestañas 1/8 de vuelta en

cualquier dirección para asegurar la caja trasera al puente de apoyo.

g. Instale el cableado dentro de la caja trasera asegurándose de que se cumplan todos los

códigos que correspondan.

h. Vuelva a colocar la tablilla adyacente, conecte el cableado al altavoz (vea las figuras 1 y 2) y

asegure que el altavoz esté usando las grapas ajustables en forma de “L”.

E. PRUEBA/FUNCIONAMIENTO

Bajo ciertas condiciones estos dispositivos pueden producir sonidos lo suficientemente

altos para causar daños al oído. Debe usar una protección adecuada para el oído si va a

estar en las cercanías al dispositivo durante la prueba. No deben excederse las

recomendaciones de la norma de nivel de sonido OSHA (29 CFR 1910).

1. Después de que la instalación esté completa, asegúrese de probar el sistema para verificar que

ambos altavoces funcionen satisfactoriamente. Si encuentra que el volumen es demasiado bajo para

su ubicación, puede seleccionar una toma de mayor potencia. Retire cuidadosamente el altavoz y

mueva el receptáculo a una toma de mayor potencia (vea las figuras 1 y 2). Instale nuevamente el

altavoz y pruebe de nuevo.

2. Después de completar la prueba inicial del sistema, establezca un programa para pruebas

periódicas de este dispositivo. Remítase al NFPA 72, a los Códigos locales sobre incendios y a la

autoridad que tenga jurisdicción para obtener esta información.

3. Proporciónele una copia de estas instrucciones al Ingeniero de seguridad, a el/los

operador(es) del sistema y al personal de mantenimiento.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA LOS OPERADORES

(Con respecto al modelo de 25/70 voltios)

Incluso si su sistema de advertencia está funcionando adecuadamente, es posible que no

sea completamente efectivo. Las personas pueden no ver, oír o hacer caso de su señal de

advertencia. Debe reconocer este hecho y asegurarse de que su señal de advertencia

logre los efectos pretendidos a través de secuencias adecuadas de pruebas/capacitación

dentro de su(s) aplicación(es) específicas, o por medio de otras acciones adecuadas.

F. MANTENIMIENTO.

Si se necesita limpiar la cara frontal de este dispositivo, se recomienda usar una solución

jabonosa suave como agente de limpieza.

-7-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTA

Aunque no se recomienda, si es necesario pintar/retocar la cara de vinilo del modelo de

rejilla, se debe utilizar una pintura vinílica para su cobertura.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA EL PERSONAL DE MANTENIMIENTO

El incumplimiento de todas las instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad en este documento

puede dar como resultado daño a la propiedad, lesiones graves o la muerte para usted u otros.

•

Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de efectuar el mantenimiento en

esta unidad.

•

Deben realizarse revisiones periódicas para asegurar que no se haya reducido la

efectividad de este dispositivo debido a que el altavoz se haya obstruido con alguna

sustancia extraña o porque se haya colocado objetos frente al altavoz.

•

Todo el mantenimiento que se le realice a esta unidad DEBE ser llevado a cabo

por un electricista capacitado de acuerdo con las normas NEC y los códigos lo-

cales.

Nunca altere esta unidad en forma alguna.

1. Revise periódicamente este dispositivo para verificar que no existen sustancias extrañas

dentro ni frente al parlante que puedan reducir su efectividad.

2. Se deben realizar pruebas periódicamente. Remítase al NFPA 72, a los Códigos locales

sobre incendios y a la autoridad que tenga jurisdicción para obtener esta información.

3. En el caso de que se requiera un ajuste de volumen u otra reparación, asegúrese de

consultar el Mensaje de seguridad para el personal de mantenimiento antes de proceder.

G. SERVICIO.

La reparación/servicio no autorizado de la unidad puede dar como resultado el

deterioro del rendimiento y/o daño a la propiedad, lesiones serias o la muerte para

usted u otros. Si se encuentra un malfuncionamiento en la unidad, no intente ningún

tipo de reparación/adaptación de las piezas en el lugar.

Federal Signal llevará a cabo el servicio de su equipo o le proporcionará asistencia técnica con

cualquier problema que no pueda ser manejado en forma local.

Cualquier unidad devuelta a Federal Signal para realizar un servicio, inspección o reparación

debe estar acompañada por una Autorización de devolución de material (R.M.A.). Esta R.M.A. se

puede obtener a través del Distribuidor local o del Representante del fabricante.

En este momento se deberá brindar una breve explicación del servicio solicitado o de la

naturaleza del malfuncionamiento.

Dirija todas las comunicaciones y envíos a:

Federal Signal Corporation

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-8-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION POUR LES MODÈLES AMR6-2570 ET AMR6-100

DE HAUT-PARLEURS ÉLECTRIQUES RÉGLABLES

Le non-respect de toutes les précautions de sécurité et instructions peuvent mener à des dommages

à la propriété, des blessures graves ou la mort pour vous ou pour d’autres.

MESSAGE DE SÉCURITÉ POUR LES INSTALLATEURS

La vie des gens dépend de votre installation sécuritaire de nos produits. Il est important de suivre

toutes les Instructions expédiées avec ces produits. Ce dispositif doit être installé par un électricien

bien formé qui connaît le Code national de l’électricité et qui respecte toutes les directives du NEC

ainsi que les codes locaux.

Le choix de l’emplacement de montage de ce dispositif, ses contrôles et l’acheminement du

câblage doit se faire sous la direction de l’ingénieur de l’installation et l’ingénieur responsable de la

sécurité. En outre, vous trouverez ci-après une liste de certaines instructions et précautions de

sécurité importantes à suivre :

•

Cet appareil doit être installé par un électricien qualifié conformément à la norme

NFPA 72, et les codes nationaux et locaux de l’électricité et des incendies, sous la

direction de l’autorité responsable.

Si l’appareil n’est pas installé dans un système de surveillance, il doit être testé à

intervalles réguliers. Reportez-vous à la norme NFPA 72 et aux codes d’incendie

locaux pour cette information.

Lisez et comprenez bien toutes les instructions avant d’installer ou de faire

fonctionner cet équipement.

•

Ne connectez pas cet appareil au système lorsque ce dernier est sous tension.

Tous les haut-parleurs de qualité de cette taille et de ce type peuvent produire des

sons forts qui pourraient provoquer, dans certaines situations, une perte auditive

permanente. Prenez les précautions voulues comme par exemple, portez une

protection auditive.

•

Après l’installation, testez le système pour vous assurer qu’Il fonctionne

correctement.

Tous les haut-parleurs de qualité de cette taille et de ce type peuvent produire des

sons forts qui pourraient provoquer, dans certaines situations, une perte auditive

permanente. L’appareil devrait être installé assez loin des auditeurs pour limiter

leur exposition tout en conservant l’efficacité de l’appareil. Le code OSHA des

règlements fédéraux sous la norme de bruit 1910.95 offre des indications qui

pourraient servir concernant les niveaux d’intensité de bruits permissibles.

•

Montrez ces instructions à votre ingénieur responsable de la sécurité, puis rangez-

les dans un endroit sûr et reportez-vous à ces instructions pour l’entretien et/ou la

réinstallation de l’appareil.

•

Établissez une procédure de vérification de routine du système de son pour assurer

une bonne activation et opération.

Consultez l’autorité responsable dans votre région quant à la bonne utilisation et

installation de ce produit.

A. GÉNÉRALITÉS.

Le haut-parleur Modèle AMR6-2570 est listé dans Underwriters Laboratories sous «Utilisation

de Signal de Protection contre l’Incendie» (désignations de catégorie UUMW, UEAY, et UEAY7) et le

Modèle AMR6-100 est listé sous “Utilisation de Signal Générale» (désignations de catégorie UEAY,

et UEAY7). Les deux modèles de haut-parleur sont listés sous UL pour utilisation dans des espaces

plénum de plafond d’air de retour.

-9-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Le modèle de 25/70 volts inclut un condensateur en ligne pour fournir l’isolation nécessaire aux

fins de supervision. Le modèle de 25/ 70 volts est conçu pour reproduire les signaux d’avertissement

électronique qui commandent les signaux de reconnaissance rapide d’urgence. En plus, les deux

modèles de haut-parleurs peuvent reproduire des tonalités, la gamme complète de la communica-

tion vocale et la musique de fond.

B. AJUSTEMENT DE COURANT.

Voir les figures 1 et 2. Vous pouvez obtenir des réglages multiples de courant par sélection des

leviers de transformateur. L’appareil est réglé en usine en position de 8 watts. Pour ajuster le

courant (volume), retirez le montage prise/fil pour régler le courant et placez-le sur le levier du

transformateur correspondant au courant voulu (voir le tableau 1). Assurez-vous que la prise soit

bien installée sur le levier.

C. SPÉCIFICATIONS.

Les modèles AMR6-2570 et AMR6-100 sont des haut-parleurs haute fidélité de 6,5 po /16,4 cm à

2 voies incorporant un globe dur de 14 mm, haut-parleur d’aigus de néodyme.

Capacité en fréquence de réponse

Tension de Supervision Maximum

Valeur nominale d’Audibilité UL

Capacités d’audibilité sur axe

@ 10 po/25,4 cm, dérivation 8 watts

Modèle AMR6-2570

110 Hz - 20,000 Hz

100V CC

Voir le Tableau 1

81 dBa, dérivation 25 volts, 85.0 dBa, dérivation 70 volts

85.0 dBa

Modèle AMR6-100

Poids

Construction

3 livres/1,361 kg

Enceinte d’ABS - UL VO, catégorie d’incendie 5VA

Grille d’acier revêtue de poudre blanche

D. INSTALLATION.

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, n’essayez pas d’installer les fils lorsque l’appareil est

sous tension.

1. Connexions électriques.

POUR LES SYSTÈMES SUPERVISÉS

Il NE faut PAS enrouler une section non-isolée d’un monoconducteur autour d’une borne

et cela ne doit pas servir comme deux connexions distinctes. Le fil doit être coupé pour

fournir la supervision électrique de la connexion.

Utilisez 2 fils 12-18 AWG pour les modèles à haut-parleurs.

Enlever 1/4" d’isolation de tous les fils conducteurs. Fixer les câbles appropriés aux bornes

correspondantes à l’arrière du haut-parleur comme représenté dans les Figures 1, 2, et 3. La borne

positive ou «+» est marquée par une tête de vis rouge. Serrer les vis pour s’assurer que les câbles

sont correctement mis en place.

Pour sélectionner la consommation en watt, se référer au paragraphe B, et voir les Figures 1

et 2. Déplacer l’ensemble prise-câble pour régler le niveau de puissance voulu. Voir le Tableau 1.

Le modèle de 25/70 volts est configuré en usine pour une opération à 70 de tension rms. Pour un

fonctionnement à 25 de tension rms, retirez l’assemblage fil/prise fourni et placez-le à l’attache de

25V (voir la figure 2). Le modèle de 100 volts est configuré pour un fonctionnement à 100 volts et

aucun besoin de connexions d’utilisateur.

2. Montage (voir la figure 4).

Les deux modèles de haut-parleurs sont installés en utilisant la boîte de fond R6BB et le

pont d’appui R6TB. Ces haut-parleurs s’installent facilement sur toute surface d’une épaisseur

entre 1/4 po/0,635 cm et 1-1/2 po/4 cm à cause des pinces uniques réglables en forme de “L” (voir la

-10-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

figure 4). Voici comment monter ce produit en utilisant la boîte de fond de modèle R6BB et le pont

d’appui de modèle R6TB dans un carreau du plafond :

a. Retirez le carreau de plafond et coupez un trou avec le gabarit fourni ou en utilisant le

pont d’appui de modèle R6TB comme gabarit.

b. Repliez vers le haut les quatre attaches en fer à cheval sur le pont (voir la figure 4).

c. Replacez le carreau et repoussez un carreau adjacent.

d. Positionnez le pont d’appui par l’ouverture du carreau adjacent et fixez-le sur le carreau

que vous venez de couper.

e. Placez la boîte arrière sur le pont d’appui en vous assurant que les quatre attaches sur le

pont se trouvent dans les fentes correspondantes sur la boîte arrière (voir la figure 4).

f. Utilisez des pinces, tournez la section supérieure des quatre attaches 1/8 de tour dans

l’une ou l’autre direction pour fixer la boîte arrière au pont d’appui.

g. Installez le câblage dans la boîte arrière en vous assurant de respecter tous les codes

applicables.

h. Remettre en place le carreau adjacent, connecter les câbles au haut-parleur (voir les

Figures 1 et 2), et fixer le haut-parleur au moyen des attaches en forme de «L» réglables.

E. TEST/FONCTIONNEMENT.

Dans certaines conditions, ces appareils peuvent émettre des sons suffisamment puis-

sants pour causer un endommagement de l’ouïe. Une protection de l’ouïe adéquate doit

être portée si l’on se trouve très près de l’appareil pendant les essais. Les Recommanda-

tions de la Norme de Niveau de Son OSHA (29 CFR 1910) ne doivent pas être dépas-

sées.

1. Après l’installation, veiller à tester le système pour vérifier que chaque haut-parleur fonc-

tionne de m anière satisfaisante. Si il est constaté que le volume est trop bas pour l’emplacement,

un niveau de watts plus élevé peut être sélectionné. Enlever le haut-parleur avec précautions et

connecter la prise à une fiche de source de watts plus élevée (voir les Figures 1 et 2). Réinstaller le

haut-parleur et retester.

2. Après avoir terminé le test initial du système établissez un programme de test à intervalles

réguliers pour cet appareil. Reportez-vous à la norme NFPA 72, les codes d’incendie locaux et

l’autorité ayant juridiction pour cette information.

3. Fournissez une copie de ces instructions à l’ingénieur responsable de la sécurité, l’opérateur

du système et le personnel responsable de l’entretien.

MESSAGE DE SÉCURITÉ POUR LES OPÉRATEURS

(concernant le modèle de 25/70 volts)

Même si votre système d’alarme fonctionne correctement, Il n’est peut-être pas

entièrement efficace. Les gens peuvent ne pas voir, entendre ou respecter votre signal

d’alarme. Vous devez reconnaître ce fait et faire en sorte que votre signal d’alarme

atteigne le but recherché en testant correctement et en établissant de bonnes séquences

au sein de votre ou vos applications précises ou par toutes autres mesures.

F. ENTRETIEN.

S’il faut nettoyer l’avant de l’appareil, il est recommandé d’utiliser une solution savonneuse

comme agent de nettoyage.

-11-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTE

Bien que cela ne soit pas recommandé, utilisez une peinture de vinyle s’il faut peindre ou

retoucher la face de vinyle des modèles à grille.

MESSAGE DE SÉCURITÉ POUR LE PERSONNEL DE L’ENTRETIEN

Le non-respect de toutes les précautions de sécurité et instructions dans ce document peuvent

mener à des dommages à la propriété, des blessures graves ou la mort pour vous ou pour d’autres.

•

Lisez et comprenez bien toutes les instructions avant d’effectuer tout entretien de

cet appareil.

•

Des vérifications périodiques doivent être faites pour s’assurer que les perfor-

mances de cet appareil n’ont pas été réduites du fait que le haut-parleur a été

bouché par des corps étrangers ou que des objets ont été placés devant le haut-

parleur.

•

Tout entretien de cet appareil DOIT être effectué par un électricien formé

conformément aux directives du NEC et des codes locaux.

Ne modifiez jamais cet appareil de quelque façon que ce soit.

1. Vérifiez périodiquement cet appareil pour vous assurer qu’il n’y ait aucune matière

étrangère à l’intérieur, devant, le haut-parleur qui pourrait réduire son efficacité.

2. Les tests devraient être effectués périodiquement. Reportez-vous à la norme NFPA 72, aux

codes d’incendie locaux et à l’autorité responsable pour cette information.

3. S’il faut un ajustement de volume ou une autre réparation, assurez-vous de vous reporter au

message de sécurité pour le personnel de l’entretien avant de poursuivre.

G. RÉPARATION.

Toute réparation ou tout entretien non autorisé de l’appareil peut mener à une

dégradation de la performance et/ou des dommages à la propriété, de graves blessures,

ou la mort pour vous ou pour d’autres. Si l’appareil fonctionne mal, n’essayez pas de

réparer ou de modifier les pièces sur le terrain.

Federal Signal réparera votre équipement ou fournira une aide technique pour tout problème

qui ne peut être solutionné localement.

Tous les appareils retournés à Federal Signal pour réparation, inspection ou entretien doivent

être accompagnés d’une autorisation de retour du matériel. Cette autorisation s’obtient du

distributeur local ou du représentant du fabricant.

Il faudrait aussi joindre une brève explication du service demandé ou la nature de la défaillance.

Adressez toutes les communications et les expéditions à :

Federal Signal Corporation

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-12-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

290A4792

Español

English

A. Modelo de 25/70 voltios

B. Primario

C. Secundario

D. Rojo

A. 25/70 Volt Model

B. Primary

C. Secondary

D. Red

E. Terminales de cableado de campo (para conexión

a conductores de 14-22 AWG)

E. Field Wiring Terminals (For Connection

to 14-22 AWG conductors)

Nota: Una sección no aislada de un único conductor

NO debe ser enlazada alrededor del tornillo termi-

nal ni ser usada como dos conexiones diferentes. El

alambre debe dividirse para proporcionar

supervisión eléctrica de las conexiones del cableado

de campo.

Note: An uninsulated section of a single conductor

must NOT be looped around the terminal screw and

used as two separate connections. The wire must be

severed to provide electrical supervision of the field

wiring connections.

Français

A. Modèle 25/70 Volts

B. Primaire

C. Secondaire

D. Rouge

E. Bornes de Câblage de Champ (Pour Connexion

aux conducteurs 14-22 AWG)

Remarque : Une section non isolée d’un conducteur

simple ne doit PAS être enroulée autour de la vis de la

borne et utilisée comme deux connexions séparées. Le

câble doit être détaché pour assurer la supervision

électrique des connexions de câblage de champ.

-13-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

290A4793

Español

English

A. Modelo de 100 voltios

B. Primario

C. Secundario

D. Rojo

A. 100 Volt Model

B. Primary

C. Secondary

D. Red

E. Terminales de cableado de campo (para

conexión a conductores de 14-22 AWG)

E. Field Wiring Terminals (For Connection

to 14-22 AWG conductors)

Nota: Una sección no aislada de un único conduc-

tor NO debe ser enlazada alrededor del tornillo

terminal ni ser usada como dos conexiones

diferentes. El alambre debe dividirse para

proporcionar supervisión eléctrica de las

conexiones del cableado de campo.

Note: An uninsulated section of a single conductor

must NOT be looped around the terminal screw

and used as two separate connections. The wire

must be severed to provide electrical supervision of

the field wiring connections.

Français

A. Modèle 100 Volts

B. Primaire

C. Secondaire

D. Rouge

E. Bornes de Câblage de Champ (Pour Connexion

aux conducteurs 14-22 AWG)

Remarque : Une section non isolée d’un conduc-

teur simple ne doit PAS être enroulée autour de la

vis de la borne et utilisée comme deux connexions

séparées. Le câble doit être détaché pour assurer la

supervision électrique des connexions de câblage

de champ.

-14-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

290A4184

Español

English

A. Tierra del parlante

B. COM

C. ENTRADA/SALIDA

D. Entrada (+)

A. Speaker Ground

B. COM

C. IN/OUT

D. Input (+)

E. Dispositivo EOL a ser suministrado por

el Fabricante del panel de control de

alarma de incendio listado.

F. Fuente de la señal del parlante de 25 ó

70 VRMS

E. EOL Device to be supplied by Listed

Fire Alarm Control Panel Manufacturer.

F. Speaker 25 or 70 VRMS Signal Source

G. First Speaker

H. Last Speaker

G. Primer parlante

H. Último parlante

Français

A. Mise à la terre du haut-parleur

B. COM

C. IN/OUT

D. Entrée (+)

E. Dispositif EOL à fournir par le fabricant

du panneau de contrôle de l’alarme

d’incendie homologué.

F. Haut-parleur de 25 ou 70 de tension RMS

source du signal

G. Premier haut-parleur

H. Dernier haut-parleur

Table 1

UL Sound Level @ 10' dBa

Tap

25 Volt

70 Volt

1 Watt

2 Watt

4 Watt

Watt

7681

Tableau 1

Niveau de son UL @ 10' dBa

Dérivation

25 Volts

70 Volts

1 Watt

2 Watts

4 Watts

Watts

7681

Tabla 1

Nivel de sonido UL @ 10' dBa

Derivación

25 Voltios

70 Voltios

1 Vatio

2 Vatios

4 Vatios

Vatios

7681

-15-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

290A4185B

Español

English

Français

A. Pestañas de herradura

B. Caja posterior R6BB

C. Puente de soporte R6TB

D. Tablilla del cielorraso

E. Altavoz AMR6

A. Horseshoe Tabs

B. R6BB Back Box

C. R6TB Support Bridge

D. Ceiling Tile

A. Fiches en fer à cheval

B. Boîte Arrière R6BB

C. Pont de Support R6TB

D. Carreau de Plafond

E. Haut-parleur AMR6

E. AMR6 Speaker

-16-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2561704C

REV. C Printed 10/03

Printed in U.S.A.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODELS AM15 and AM15XD2

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL AM15 AND AM15XD2

AUDIOMASTER® SPEAKER

MODELOS AM15 y AM15XD2

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACION PARA LOS PARLANTE

MODELOS AM15 Y AM15XD2 AUDIOMASTER®

MODELES AM15 et AM15XD2

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION POUR LE HAUT-PARLEUR

AUDIOMASTER® MODELES AM15 ET AM15XD2

Address all communications and shipments to:

Dirija todas la correspondencia y envíos a:

Adressez toutes les communiations et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODELAM15 AND AM15XD2

AUDIOMASTER® SPEAKER

WARNING

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage,

serious injury, or death to you or others.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS

Peoples lives depend on your safe installation of our products. It is important to follow all

instructions shipped with the products. This device is to be installed by a trained electrician who is

thoroughly familiar with the National Electric Code and will follow the NEC guidelines as well as

local codes.

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and routing of the wiring is to be

accomplished under the direction of the Facilities Engineer and the Safety Engineer. In addition,

listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:

•

Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.

This unit must be installed by a qualified electrician in accordance with NFPA 72, and National

and local Electrical and Fire Codes, under the direction of the authority having jurisdiction.

•

Do not connect this unit to the system when power is on.

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause , in certain situations,

permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing

protection.

•

After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper operation.

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in certain situations,

permanent hearing loss. The device should be installed far enough away from potential listeners

to limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal

Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which may be used regarding permis-

sible noise exposure levels.

•

Show these instructions to your Safety Engineer and then file them in a safe place and refer to

them when maintaining and/or reinstalling the unit.

After installation and completion of initial system test, a program of periodic testing of this device

must be established. Refer to NFPA 72G, local Fire Codes and the authority having jurisdiction

for this information.

•

Consult the authority having jurisdiction in your area regarding the proper use and installation of

this product.

I. GENERAL.

The AudioMaster Model AM15 and AM15XD2 are indoor/outdoor rated, 15 watt power output (8

ohm) loudspeakers for use with general signaling systems such as Federal Signal’s FS.COMMS™

or SelectFone® systems. They are designed to reproduce full range voice communication. They

are suitable for use in areas with high ambient noise levels. The speaker projector is adjustable

and may be repositioned to obtain desired sound distribution.

The AM15XD2 is suitable for use in Class I, Groups A, B, C, & D, Division 2, and Class II,

Groups F & G, Division 2 classified and Class III hazardous locations.

II. SPECIFICATIONS.

Operating Voltage

Power Input (selectable)

Weight (approx.)

Impedance

11 Vrms max

15 W max

5 lb. (2.25kg)

8-ohm

-1-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Size

12-5/8" (320mm) high, 8-1/8" (206mm) wide,

8-1/4" (209mm) deep.

Construction

Aluminum enclosure painted with grey enamel.

Amplifier housing sealed with neoprene rubber gasket.

III. INSTALLATION.

A. Unpacking.

After unpacking the speaker, examine it carefully for possible damage that may have occurred

in transit. If equipment has been damaged, immediately file a claim with the carrier stating

extent of damage. Carefully check all shipping labels and tags for special instructions before

removing or destroying them.

B. Mounting Arrangements (See figure 1).

CAUTION

To maintain the hazardous location rating of the Model AM15XD2, do not use the 7/8" knockout

(concealed conduit mounting).

The speaker can be mounted on any relatively flat surface. Conduit connection can be made to

1/2" threaded opening at bottom of housing or, in the case of the AM15, to 7/8" knockout

in rear of housing. After the mounting location and mounting method have been selected,

proceed with the applicable instructions below.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if an accumulation of water, snow, dust, etc.

resides in the speaker projector, severely reducing or preventing operation of this device.

Mount the unit so speaker projector is pointed horizontally or slightly downward.

1. Flat Surface Mounting.

a. Remove and retain the two screws that secure cover to housing. Remove the cover.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if any objects are in front of speaker,

severely reducing optimum sound distribution. For maximum effectiveness, ensure that the front

of the speaker is clear of obstructions.

b. Select the mounting location and place rear of housing against mounting surface.

c. Using the mounting holes (two (2) inside the Model AM15’s housing or four (4) in the

AM15XD2’s external mounting bracket) as a template, scribe drill position marks on the

mounting surface. See figure 1 for mounting hole locations and dimensions.

CAUTION

Before drilling holes in any surface, ensure that both sides of surface are clear of items

that could be damaged.

d. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with #10 screws appropriate for the type of

mounting surface material.

-2-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the projector is mishandled during

installation or over time. DO NOT rotate the projector more than 180 degrees or

internal speaker wiring may be damaged.

e. Reposition speaker projector if necessary to obtain desired sound coverage.

Loosen collar nut (see figure 1) and move projector to desired position.

f. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph III.C. Electrical Connections below

and make the necessary electrical connections.

2. Model AM15 Concealed Conduit Mounting.

a. Remove and retain the two screws that secure cover to housing. Remove the cover.

b. Remove the 7/8" knockout at rear of housing.

c. Install the conduit connection.

NOTE

If installation on an existing electrical box is desired, an optional Model CC adapter

plate is required.

d. Select the mounting location and place rear of housing against mounting surface.

e. Using the two (2) mounting holes as a template, scribe drill position marks on the

mounting surface. See figure 1 for mounting hole locations and dimensions.

CAUTION

Before drilling holes in any surface, ensure that both sides of surface are clear of items

that could be damaged.

f. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with #10 screws appropriate for the type of

mounting surface material.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the projector is mishandled during

installation or over time. DO NOT rotate the projector more than 180 degrees or

internal speaker wiring may be damaged.

g. Reposition speaker projector if necessary to obtain desired sound coverage.

Loosen collar nut (see figure 1) and move projector to desired position.

h. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph III.C. Electrical Connections below

and make the necessary electrical connections.

C. Electrical Connections.

DANGER

To avoid electrical shock, do not connect wires when circuits are energized.

NOTE

Audio wires should be sized properly by your licensed installation electrician for your service

application. This cable requires a twisted shielded pair with an 18AWG mimum and should

produce no more than 15% signal loss over the length of the cable run.

National Electrical Code as well as local codes must be adhered to in installation of these

models. All electrical wiring must be routed through approved conduit and fittings. The use of

metal conduit and fittings is required to provide grounding of the enclosure.

1. See figures 2 and 3. Connect the audio common (-) leads to the speaker’s common terminal

and audio positive (+) leads to (+) (SIG) terminal.

-3-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the housing is not closed properly.

To reduce the possibility of explosion, the Model AM15XD2’s housing cover must

be kept tight while circuits are energized.

2. Be sure the neoprene rubber cover gasket is properly seated in the housing groove and

reinstall housing cover.

IV. TESTING/OPERATING.

WARNING

Under certain conditions these devices are capable of producing sounds loud enough to cause

hearing damage. Adequate hearing protection should be worn if standing within close proximity

to device while testing. Recommendations in the OSHA Sound Level Standard

(29 CFR 1910) should not be exceeded.

A. After installation is complete, be sure to test the system to verify that each speaker operates

satisfactorily. If it is found that the unit is too loud for its location, adjust speaker volume level

at the source.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the housing is not closed properly.

To reduce the possibility of explosion, the Model AM15XD2’s housing cover must

be kept tight while circuits are energized.

B. After completion of initial system test, establish a program for periodic testing of this device.

C. Provide a copy of these instructions for the Safety Engineer, system operator(s) and

maintenance personnel.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS

Even if your warning system is operating properly, it may not be completely effective.

People may not hear or heed your warning signal. You must recognize this fact and ensure that

your warning signal achieves its intended effect through proper test/training sequences within

your specific application(s).

V. MAINTENANCE.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage, serious

injury, or death to you or others.

•

Read and understand all instructions before performing maintenance on this unit.

To reduce the risk of electrical shock, or ignition of hazardous atmospheres, do not perform

maintenance or service on this unit when circuits are energized.

•

Periodic checks should be made to ensure that effectiveness of this device has not been reduced

because speaker has become clogged with a foreign substance or because objects have been

placed in front of the speaker.

•

Any maintenance to this unit MUST be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with

NEC guidelines and local codes.

Never alter this unit in any manner. Safety in hazardous locations may be jeopardized if additional

openings or alterations are made to Model AM15XD2.

The nameplates, which contain cautionary or other information of importance to maintenance

personnel, should not be obscured if exterior of device is painted.

-4-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A. Periodically check this device to verify that there are no foreign substances in, or in front of,

the speaker which will reduce its effectiveness.

B. Testing should be periodically performed. Refer to NFPA 72G, local Fire Codes and the

authority having jurisdiction for information.

C. In the event a volume adjustment or other repair is required, be sure to refer to the Safety

Message For Maintenance Personnel before proceeding.

VI. SERVICE.

WARNING

Unauthorized repair/servicing of the unit may result in degradation of performance and/or property

damage, serious injury, or death to you or others. If a malfunctioning unit is encountered,

do not attempt any field repair/retrofit of parts.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems that

cannot be handled locally.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair, must be accompanied by a

Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A. can be obtained from the local Distributor or

Manufacturer’s Representative.

At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction, should

be given.

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-5-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACION PARA LOS PARLANTE

MODELOS AM15 Y AM15XD2 AUDIOMASTER®

PRECAUCION

El no seguir todas las instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad puede acarrear daños a la propiedad,

heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD A LOS INSTALADORES

La vida de personas depende de la instalación segura de nuestros productos. Es importante seguir

todas las instrucciones empacadas con los productos. Este dispositivo lo debe instalar un electricista

calificado que esté familiarizado con el Código Nacional Eléctrico y siga las normas así como los

códigos locales.

La selección del sitio de montaje del dispositivo, sus controles y la ruta del alambrado, se hará bajo

la dirección del Ingeniero de las facilidades y del Ingeniero de seguridad. Sin embargo, a

continuación se listan algunas otras instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad que se deben seguir:

•

Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de instalar u operar este equipo.

Esta unidad debe ser instalada por un electricista calificado de acuerdo con el NFPA 72 y los

códigos eléctricos y de incendio Nacionales y locales, bajo la dirección de la autoridad

competente.

•

No conecte esta unidad al sistema si está encendido.

Todos los parlantes efectivos de prevención producen sonidos fuertes, que pueden causar en

ciertas ocasiones, pérdida permanente del oído y se deben tomar las debidas precauciones tales

como usar protectores auditivos.

•

Después de instalado, asegúrese de que el sistema de sonido ofrece una operación apropiada.

Todos los parlantes efectivos de prevención producen sonidos tan fuertes que pueden causar

pérdida permanente del oído. El aparato debe ser instalado lo bastante lejos de los oyentes

potenciales para limitar su exposición mientras mantenga su efectividad. El código OSHA

1910.95 (EEUU) de regulación Federal del ruido, da las guías que deben usarse para los niveles

de exposición permisible al ruido.

•

Enseñe estas instrucciones a su Ingeniero de Seguridad y después archívelas en un lugar seguro y

consúltelas cuando le haga mantenimiento o reinstale la unidad.

Después de la instalación y prueba inicial del sistema, programe pruebas periódicas de este

aparato. Diríjase al NFPA 72G, los Códigos locales de incendio y la autoridad competente para

obtener esta información.

•

Consulte con la autoridad competente en su área, lo correspondiente al correcto uso e instalación

de este producto.

I. GENERAL.

Los modelos AM15 y AM15XD2 de AudioMaster están clasificados para uso externo/interno.

Tienen parlantes de 15 vatios de potencia de salida (8 ohmios) para utilizar con los sistemas de

señalización generales como los sistemas SelectFone© o FS.COMMS™ de Federal Signal. Éstos

están diseñados para reproducir comunicación de voz de alcance completo. Son adecuados para

utilizar en áreas con niveles altos de ruido ambiental. El proyector del parlante se ajusta y se

puede cambiar de posición para obtener la distribución de sonido deseada.

El AM15XD2 es adecuado para utilizar en sitios Clase 1, Grupos A, B, C, y D, División 2, Clase

II, Grupos F y G, División 2 clasificados y Clase III peligrosos.

II. ESPECIFICACIONES.

Voltaje de funcionamiento

Potencia máxima aplicable

Peso (aproximado)

11 voltios eficaces máx.

15 vatios máx.

5 libras (2,25 kg)

-6-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Impedancia

Tamaño

8 ohmios

302mm (alto), 206mm (ancho), 209mm (largo)

Caja en aluminio pintada con esmalte gris.

Caja del amplificador sellada con un empaque

de neopreno.

Construcción

III. INSTALACION.

A. Desempaque.

Después de desempacar la unidad, examine cuidadosamente si hay daños de transporte.

Si hubo daños, haga de inmediato un reclamo al transportador, estableciendo el monto del

daño. Revise cuidadosamente todos los sellos de embarque y marquillas por instrucciones

especiales antes de removerlos o destruirlos.

B. Arreglos de montaje (Ver figura 1).

PREVENCION

Para mantener la clasificación de seguridad en áreas peligrosas del Modelo AM15XD2,

no use el disco removible de 7/8" (montaje en conduit embebido).

El parlante puede ser montado en una superficie relativamente plana. Las conexiones de

conduit pueden ser de rosca de 1/2" con entrada en la parte baja de la caja. También el Modelo

AM15 puede ser montado por un disco removible al fondo de la caja. Después de que la

localización de montaje y el método de montaje ha sido seleccionado, proceda con las

instrucciones que se listan a continuación.

PRECAUCION

Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias o la muerte podrían ocurrir si se presenta una acumulación de

agua, nieve , polvo, etc en el parlante, lo que reduce severamente o evita la operación del dispositivo.

Manatenga el parlante en posición horizontal o con una ligera inclinación hacia abajo.

1. Montaje en Superficie Plana.

a. Afloje los 2 tornillos que aseguran la tapa de la caja. Retire la tapa.

PRECAUCION

Daños a la propiedad, heridos graves o incluso su muerte o la de otros puede ocurrir si cualquier

objeto está en frente del parlante, reduciendo severamente la distribución óptima del sonido.

Para mayor efectividad, asegúrese de que el frente del parlante esté

despejado de cualquier obstáculo.

b. Seleccione la localización de montaje y coloque la parte posterior de la caja contra la

superficie de montaje.

c. Usando los huecos de montaje (dos dentro de la caja del Modelo AM15 o 4 en el soporte

de montaje del Modelo AM15XD2) como una plantilla, marque los puntos a perforar en

la superficie de montaje. Vea la figura 1 para localización y dimensión de los huecos de

montaje.

PREVENCION

Antes de perforar los huecos en cualquier superficie, asegúrese de que ambos lados de la superficie

están despejados de cualquier cosa que puede dañarse.

-7-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

d. Asegure la unidad a la superficie de montaje con tornillos #10 apropiados para el tipo de

material de la superficie de montaje.

PRECAUCION

Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso la muerte pueden ocurrir si el parlante es mal

manejado durante la instalación o con el tiempo. NO rote el parlante más de

180º o el cableado interno del parlante sufrirá daños.

e. Reposicione el parlante, si es necesario, para obtener la cobertura de sonido deseada.

Afloje la tuerca (ver figura 1) y mueva el proyector a la posición deseada.

f. Antes de reinstalar la tapa a la caja, lea el párrafo III. C las Conexiones Eléctricas que se

listan abajo y haga todas las conecciones eléctricas necesarias.

2. Montaje en Conduit Embebido del Modelo AM15.

a. Retire y conserve los dos tornilos que aseguran la tapa a la caja. Retire la tapa.

b. Retire el disco variable de 7/8" de la parte posterior de la caja.

c. Instale la conexión del conduit.

NOTA

Si se desea una instalación en una caja eléctrica ya existente, se requiere una

plato adaptador opcional Modelo CC.

d. Seleccione la localización de montaje y coloque la parte posterior de la caja contra la

superficie de montaje.

e. Use los dos huecos de montaje como una platina, marque los puntos a perforar en la

superficie de montaje. Vea la figura 1 para las dimensiones y localización de los huecos

de montaje.

PRECAUCION

Antes de perforar los huecos en cualquier superficie, asegúrese de que ambos lados

de la superficie están libres de cosas que se puedan dañar.

f. Asegure la unidad a la superficie de montaje con tornillos #10 apropiados para el tipo de

material de la superficie de montaje.

PREVENCION

Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros pueden ocurrir si el proyector

no se maneja adecuadamente durante la instalación o cualquier tiempo después. NO rote el

proyector más de 180º o el cableado interno del parlante puede sufrir daños.

g. Reposicione el proyector si es necesario para obtener la cobertura de sonido deseada.

Afloje la tuerca (ver figura 1) y mueva el proyector a la posición deseada.

h. Antes de reinstalar la tapa de la caja, lea el parágrafo III.C, las conexiones eléctricas que

se listan abajo y haga todas las conecciones eléctricas necesarias.

C. Conexiones Eléctricas.

PELIGRO

Para evitar descargas eléctricas, no conecte cables cuando los circuitos estén energizados.

NOTA

Los cables de audio deben tener el tamaño correcto seleccionado por un electricista instalador

autorizado para su aplicación de servicio. Este cable requiere un par trenzado blindado con un cable

calibre 18AWG como mínimo y debe producir menos de 15% de pérdida de señal

a lo largo del tramo del cable.

Durante la instalación de estos modelos, deben seguirse los Códigos Eléctricos Nacionales así

como los locales. Todo el cableado debe hacerse a través de conduit y accesorios aprobados.

Estos sería de metal si van a servir como tierra de la caja.

-8-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Vea las figuras 2 y 3. Conecte los conductores comunes (-) de audio al terminal común del

altavoz y los conductores positivos (+) de audio al terminal (+) (SIG).

PREVENCION

Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros puede ocurrir, si la caja no se

cierra adecuadamente. Para reducir la posibilidad de explosión, la tapa de la caja del Modelo

AM15XD2 se debe mantener bien cerrado mientras los circuitos estén energizados.

2. Asegúrese de que el empaque de neopreno de la caja está bien colocado en la ranura de la

caja y reinstale la tapa de la caja.

IV. PRUEBA/OPERACION.

PRECAUCION

Bajo ciertas condiciones estos dispositivos son capaces de producir sonidos suficientemente fuertes

como para causar daños auditivos. Se debe usar adecuada protección auditiva si se va a premanecer

dentro de cierta proximidad al dispositivo cuando se está probando. Las recomendaciones de la

OSHA (EEUU) con respeto a los Niveles Estándares de Ruido (29CFR 1910) no se deben exceder.

A. Al terminar la instalación asegúrese de probar el sistema para verificar que cada altavoz fun

cione en forma satisfactoria. Si se determina que la unidad tiene un volumen demasiado

alto para el lugar donde está ubicada, ajuste el nivel de volumen del altavoz en la fuente.

PRECAUCION

Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias o incluso su muerte o la de otros puede ocurrir si la caja no se

cierra adecuadamente. Para reducir la posibilidad de explosión, la tapa de la caja del Modelo

AM15XD2 se debe mantener bien cerrado mientras los circuitos están energizados.

B. Después de terminar la prueba inicial del sistema, establezca un programa periódico de prueba

de este dispositivo

C. Provea una copia de estas instrucciones al Ingeniero de Seguridad, los operadores del sistema y

el personal de mantenimiento.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD A LOS OPERADORES

Aún si su sistema está operando adecuadamente, el puede no ser completamente efectivo.

La gente puede no oir o atender su señal de alarma. Usted debe detectar este hecho y asegurarse

de que la señal de alarma alcance el efecto deseado por pruebas o simulacros apropiados dentro de

su aplicación específica.

V. MANTENIMIENTO.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA EL PERSONAL DE MANTENIMIENTO

El no seguir todas las precauciones e instrucciones que se listan a continuación, puede resultan en

daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros .

•

Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de operar este equipo.

Para reducir el riesgo de descarga eléctrica, o ignición de atmósferas peligrosas, no realice

mantenimiento a esta unidad cuando los circuitos estén energizados.

•

Se deben realizar pruebas periódicas para asegurar que la efectividad de este dispositivo no se ha

reducido por que el parlante se bloquea con sustancias extrañas o hay objetos extraños delante del

parlante.

•

Cualquier mantenimiento a la unidad TIENE que ser hecho por un electricista entrenado de

acuerdo con el NEC y los códigos locales.

Nunca altere la unidad de manera alguna. La seguridad en sitios de alto riesgo puede ponerse en

peligro si se adicionan agujeros o se hacen alteraciones al Modelo AM15XD2.

La placa, que puede tener información de importancia o precauciones para el personal de

mantenimiento, no se debera cubrir con pintura si la carcaza exterior se pinta.

-9-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A. Periódicamente revise este dispositivo para verificar que no hay sustancias extrañas dentro, o

en frente, del parlante lo que reduce su efectividad.

B. Se debe realizar una prueba periódica. Lea NFPA 72G, códigos locales de incendios o

autoridad competente para sumistrar esta información.

C. En el evento de que se requiera un ajuste de volumen, o una reparación, antes de proceder

diríjase al Mensaje de Seguridad para el Personal de Mantenimiento.

VI. SERVICIO.

PRECAUCION

Reparación o servicio no autorizado de la unidad puede resultar en degradación del desempeño

y/o daños a la propiedad, heridas graves e incluso su muerte o la de otros. Si se encuentra un mal

funcionamiento de la unidad, no intente ninguna reparación en el sitio/o reutilizar partes usadas.

La Federal Signal Corporation le hará servicio a su equipo o proveerá asistencia técnica a los

problemas que no se puedan manejar localmente.

Cualquier unidad que se devuelva a Federal Signal para servicio, inspección o reparación, debe

acompañarse de una autorización de “material devuelto” (R.M.A.). Esta R.M.A. se puede

obtener con el representante o distribuidor local del fabricante y se adjuntará una breve

explicación de la necesidad del servicio o la naturaleza del mal funcionamiento.

Dirija todas las comunicaciones y envíos a:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-10-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION POUR LE HAUT-PARLEUR AUDIOMASTER®

MODELES AM15 ET AM15XD2

AVERTISSEMENT

Le non-respect de toutes les précautions et instructions de sécurité peut résulter en dommages aux

biens, en blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.

MESSAGE DE SECURITE AUX INSTALLATEURS

Ces vies humaines dépendent de votre installation de nos produits en sécurité. Il est important de

lire, comprendre et suivre toutes les instructions expédiées avec ce produit. Ce dispositif doit être

installé par un électricien professionnel qui est complètement au courant du Code Electrique

National et respectera les recommandations NEC ainsi que les codes locaux.

Le choix de l’endroit de montage du dispositif, de ses commandes et du passage des câbles doit être

effectué sous la direction de l’ingénieur des services électriques et de l’ingénieur de sécurité. De

plus, sont énumérées ci-dessous quelques autres instructions et précautions de sécurité importantes

que vous devez suivre:

•

Lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d’installer ou d’utiliser ce matériel.

Cet appareil doit être installé par un électricien professionnel conformément à NFPA 72, et aux

codes électriques et incendie nationaux et locaux, sous la direction de l’autorité qui a la

juridiction.

•

Ne connectez pas cette unité au système si la tension est présente.

Tous les haut-parleurs effectifs d’avertissement produisent des sons puissants qui peuvent causer

dans certaines situations une perte permanente de l’ouïe. Vous devez prendre des précautions

appropriées comme le port de protection de l’ouïe.

•

Après installation, essayez le système de signalisation d’urgence pour vérifier que son

fonctionnement est correct.

Tous les haut-parleurs d’avertissement effectifs produisent des sons forts qui peuvent causer dans

certaines situations la perte de l’ouïe. Le dispositif doit être installé suffisamment loin des

auditeurs potentiels pour limiter leur exposition tout en maintenant son efficacité. Le code OSHA

de Federal Regulations 1910.95 (Norme de bruit) donne des recommandations qui peuvent être

utilisées concernant les niveaux d’exposition au bruit permis.

•

Montrez ces instructions à votre ingénieur de sécurité puis classez-les dans un endroit sûr et

référez-vous à elles lorsque vous entretenez ou réinstallez l’appareil.

Après installation et fin du test initial du système, un programme d’essai périodique de ce

dispositif doit être établi. Référez-vous à NFPA 72G, codes locaux d’incendie et à

l’administration qui a la juridiction pour ces informations.

•

Consultez l’administration qui a la juridiction dans votre zone concernant l’utilisation et

l’installation correctes de ce produit.

I. GÉNÉRALITÉS

Les modèles AudioMaster AM15 et AM15XD2 sont d’une capacité nominale convenant pour

l’intérieur et l’extérieur, les haut-parleurs d’une sortie de courant de 15 watts (8 ohms) à utiliser

avec les systèmes généraux d’appel tels que les systèmes SelectFunc® et FS.COMMS™ de

Federal Signal. Ils sont conçus pour reproduire la gamme complète de communication vocale. Ils

conviennent pour les endroits aux niveaux élevés de bruits ambiants. Le projecteur de haut-

parleur s’ajuste et peut être replacé pour obtenir la diffusion de son désirée.

Le modèle AM15XD2 convient pour les endroits dangereux de Classe I, groupes A, B, C, et D,

division 2 et de classe II, groupes F et G, division 2 classifiée et de Classe III..

-11-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

II. SPECIFICATIONS.

Tension de fonctionnement

Puissance consommée

Poids (approx.)

11 Vrms max.

15 W max.

5 lb (2,25 kg)

8 ohms

Impédance

Dimensions

12-5/8" (320 mm) de hauteur x 8-1/8" (206 mm) de

largeur x 8-1/4" (209 mm) de profondeur.

Construction

Enceinte en aluminium peint en émail gris.

Carter d’amplificateur scellé avec joint

caoutchouc néoprène.

III. INSTALLATION.

A. Déballage.

Après déballage du haut-parleur, inspectez-le pour voir s’il a été endommagé pendant le

transport. S’il a été endommagé, faites une déclaration immédiatement auprès du transporteur

en indiquant les dommages. Vérifiez soigneusement toutes les enveloppes, les étiquettes

d’expédition et les étiquettes volantes avant de les retirer ou les détruire.

B. Dispositions de Montage (Voir figure 1).

ATTENTION

Pour maintenir la classification pour endroits dangereux du modèle AM15XD2, n’utilisez pas

le trou à déboucher de 7/8" (montage à conduit caché).

Le haut-parleur peut être monté sur toute surface relativement plate. La connexion conduit peut

être faite avec l’ouverture taraudée de 1/2" en bas du carter ou dans le cas du AM15, à la pièce

chassée de 7/8" à l’arrière du carter. Après sélection de l’emplacement de montage et de la

méthode de montage, procédez avec les instructions applicables ci-dessous.

AVERTISSEMENT

Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si une accumulation

d’eau, de neige, de poussières, etc. se trouvent dans le cornet du haut-parleur, réduisant gravement

ou empêchant le fonctionnement de ce dispositif. Montez l’unité de manière que le cornet du

haut-parleur soit dirigé horizontalement ou légèrement vers le bas.

1. Montage sur Surface Plane.

a. Retirez et gardez les deux vis qui fixent le couvercle sur le carter. Retirez le carter.

AVERTISSEMENT

Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si des objets se

trouvent devant le haut-parleur réduisant gravement la répartition optimale de son. Pour une

efficacité maximale, assurez-vous que l’avant du haut-parleur est dégagé de toute obstruction.

b. Sélectionnez l’emplacement de montage et placez l’arrière du carter contre la surface de

montage.

c. A l’aide des trous de montage (2) à l’intérieur du carter du Modèle AM15 ou quatre (4)

dans le support de montage externe du AM15XD2 comme gabarit, marquez les positions

de perçage sur la surface de montage. Voir figure 1 pour les emplacements des trous de

montage et les dimensions.

-12-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ATTENTION

Avant de percer des trous dans une surface, assurez-vous que les deux côtés de la surface sont

dégagés de tout élément qui pourrait être endommagé.

d. Fixez l’appareil à la surface de montage avec les 10 vis appropriées pour le type de

matière de la surface de montage.

AVERTISSEMENT

Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le cornet est

malmené pendant l’installation ou plus tard. Ne faites pas tourner le cornet de plus de 180º,

sinon le câblage intérieur du haut-parleur peut être endommagé.

e. Repositionnez le cornet du haut-parleur si nécessaire pour obtenir la couverture sonore

désirée. Desserrez l’écrou à embase (voir figure 1) et déplacez le cornet jusqu’à la

position désirée.

f. Avant de réinstaller le couvercle du carter, lisez le paragraphe III.C Connexions

électriques ci-dessous et faites les connexions électriques nécessaires.

2. Montage sur Conduit Caché Modèle AM15.

a. Retirez et gardez les deux vis qui fixent le couvercle au carter. Démonter le carter.

b. Enlever la pièce chassée 7/8" à l’arrière du carter.

c. Installez la connexion du conduit.

NOTE

Si l’installation sur un boîtier électrique existant est désirée, une plaque adaptateur

Modèle CC, en option, est nécessaire.

d. Sélectionnez l’endroit de montage et placez l’arrière du carter contre la surface du

montage.

e. A l’aide des deux trous de montage comme gabarit, marquez des positions de perçage sur

la surface de montage. Voir la figure 1 pour les emplacements des trous de montage et les

dimensions.

ATTENTION

Avant de percer des trous dans une surface, assurez-vous que les deux côtés de la surface sont

dégagés de tout élément qui pourrait être endommagé.

f. Fixez l’appareil à la surface de montage avec les 10 vis appropriées pour le type de

matière de la surface de montage.

WARNING

Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le cornet est

malmené pendant l’installation ou plus tard. Ne faites pas tourner le cornet de plus de 180º,

sinon le câblage intérieur du haut-parleur peut être endommagé.

g. Repositionnez le cornet du haut-parleur si nécessaire pour obtenir la couverture sonore

désirée. Desserrez l’écrou à collerette (voir figure 1) et déplacez le cornet jusqu’à la

position désirée.

h. Avant de réinstaller le couvercle du carter, lisez le paragraphe III.C Connexions

électriques ci-dessous et faites les connexions électriques nécessaires.

-13-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C. Connexions Electriques.

DANGER

Pour éviter des chocs électriques, ne connectez pas les fils si les circuits sont sous tension.

NOTE

Les fils audio doivent être choisis par votre électricien d’installation agréé pour votre application de

service. Ce câble exige une paire de fils torsadés et blindés d’un mimum de 18AWG et devrait

produire au plus une perte de signal de 15% sur la longueur du câble.

Le National Electrical Code ainsi que les codes locaux doivent être respectés lors de

l’installation de ces modèles. Tout le câblage électrique doit être passé à travers des conduits et

raccords approuvés. L’utilisation de conduits et raccords métalliques est nécessaire pour

permettre la mise à la terre de l’enceinte.

1. Voir le figures 2 et 3. Connecter les fils communs (-) audio à la borne commune du haut-

parleur et aux fils positifs (+) audio à la borne (+) (SIG).

AVERTISSEMENT

Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le carter n’est pas

fermé correctement. Pour réduire la possibilité d’explosion, le couvercle de carter du Modèle

AM15XD2 doit être maintenu fermé étanche pendant que les circuits sont sous tension.

2. Assurez-vous que le joint de couvercle en caoutchouc Néoprène est bien assis dans la

rainure du carter et réinstallez le couvercle du carter.

IV. ESSAI/FONCTIONNEMENT.

AVERTISSEMENT

Dans certaines situations, ces dispositifs peuvent produire des sons suffisamment forts pour causer

des dommages à l’ouïe. Une protection adéquate de l’ouïe doit être portée si on est très près du

dispositif pendant les essais. Les recommandations de la Norme OSHA de niveau de son

(29 CFR 1910) ne doit pas être dépassées.

A. A. Après avoir terminé l’installation, assurez-vous de tester le système pour vérifier que chaque

haut-parleur fonctionne correctement. Si vous trouvez que l’appareil est trop fort pour

l’emplacement choisi, ajustez le niveau du volume du haut-parleur à la source.

AVERTISSEMENT

Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le carter n’est pas

fermé correctement. Pour réduire la possibilité d’explosion, le couvercle de carter du Modèle

AM15XD2 doit être maintenu fermé étanche pendant que les circuits sont sous tension.

B. Après fin de l’essai initial du système, établissez un programme pour essai périodique de ce

dispositif.

C. Fournissez une copie de ces instructions à l’ingénieur de sécurité, à l’opérateur du système et

au personnel d’entretien.

MESSAGE DE SECURITE AUX OPERATEURS

Même si votre système d’avertissement fonctionne correctement, il peut ne pas être complètement

efficace. Les gens peuvent ne pas voir, entendre ou respecter votre signal d’avertissement. Vous

devez reconnaître ce fait et vous assurer que votre signal d’avertissement a l’effet voulu par des

séquences correctes d’essai/formation dans votre application spécifique.

-14-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

V. ENTRETIEN.

MESSAGE DE SECURITE AU PERSONNEL D’ENTRETIEN

Le non-respect des précautions et instructions de sécurité peut en résulter en dommages aux biens,

blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.

•

Lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d’utiliser ce système.

Pour réduire le risque de chocs électriques ou un allumage d’atmosphères dangereuses,

n’effectuez pas d’entretien ou de service sur cet appareil si les circuits sont sous tension.

•

Des vérifications périodiques doivent être faites pour assurer que l’efficacité de ce dispositif n’a

pas été réduite parce que le haut-parleur s’est bouché avec des matières étrangères ou parce que

des objets ont été placés devant le haut-parleur.

•

Tout entretien de cet appareil DOIT être fait par un électricien professionnel conformément aux

recommandations NEC et aux codes locaux.

Ne jamais modifier l’unité de quelle que manière que ce soit. La sécurité dans des lieux

dangereux peut être mise en cause si des ouvertures supplémentaires ou d’autres modifications

sont faites au Modèle AM15XD2.

•

Les plaques de caractéristiques, qui contiennent des informations d’avertissement ou autre,

importantes pour le personnel d’entretien, ne doivent pas être cachées si l’extérieur du dispositif

est peint.

A. Vérifiez périodiquement ce dispositif pour vérifier qu’il n’y a pas de produits étrangers dans ou

devant le haut-parleur qui puissent réduire son efficacité.

B. Un essai doit être effectué périodiquement. Référez-vous à NFPA 72G, aux codes locaux

incendie et à l’administration qui a la juridiction pour ces informations.

C. Au cas où un ajustage de volume ou une autre réparation serait nécessaire, assurez-vous de

vous référer au message de sécurité pour le personnel d’entretien avant de continuer.

VI. SERVICE.

AVERTISSEMENT

Des réparations ou un service non autorisé de cet appareil peuvent résulter en dégradation des

performances et/ou dommages aux biens, blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.

Si vous découvrez un appareil ne fonctionnant pas bien, n’essayez pas de réparer sur

place ou de remplacer des pièces.

L’usine de Federal Signal fera le service de votre matériel et fournira une assistance technique

pour tout problème qui ne puisse être traité localement.

Toutes les unités renvoyées à Federal Signal pour un service, inspection ou réparation doivent être

accompagnées d’une autorisation de retour de matériel. Cette R.M.A. peut être obtenue auprès du

distributeur local ou du représentant du fabricant.

A ce moment, une courte explication du service demandé, ou la nature du mauvais

fonctionnement doit être donnée.

Adressez toutes les communications et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-15-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-16-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AM15

AM15XD2

RED

BLK

290A3810B

English

A. Speaker models

Español

A. Parlante modelos

Français

A. Haut-parleur modeles

-17-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

290A3808

English

A. NOTE: Label appears on this side of terminal strip. Shown here on mounting

bracket for reference only.

B. Common (-) leads to common terminal.

C. Positive (+) leads to (+) or SIG.

Español

A. NOTA: Las letras aparecen en este lado de la regleta de conexiones. Se muestran

aquí en el soporte de montaje solo como referencia

B. Conectores comunes (-) al terminal común.

C. Cables positivos (+) al terminal (+) o (SIG).

Français

A. NOTE:-Les lettres sur ce cote de la bande de borne montrees ici sur le supporte

de montage sont donnees uniquement pour reference.

B. Les cables communs (-) sur la borne commune.

C. Fils positifs (+) à la borne (+) ou (SIG).

-18-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2561540C

REV. C 500

Printed in U.S.A.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SERIES C, MODELS AM300 and AM300GCX

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR SERIES C, MODEL AM300 AND

AM300GCX AUDIOMASTER® SPEAKER

SERIES C, MODELOS AM300 y AM300GCX

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN PARA PARLANTES AUDIOMASTER®

SERIES C, MODELO AM300 Y AM300GCX

SÉRIE C, MODÈLES AM300 et AM300GCX

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION POUR LA SÉRIE C, MODÈLES AM300 et

AM300GCX AUDIOMASTER@ SPEAKER

Address all communications and shipments to:

Dirija todas la correspondencia y envíos a:

Adressez toutes les communiations et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODELAM300 AND AM300GCX

AUDIOMASTER® SPEAKER

WARNING

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage,

serious injury, or death to you or others.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS

Peoples lives depend on your safe installation of our products. It is important to follow all

instructions shipped with the products. This device is to be installed by a trained electrician who is

thoroughly familiar with the National Electric Code and will follow the NEC guidelines as well as

local codes.

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and routing of the wiring is to be

accomplished under the direction of the Facilities Engineer and the Safety Engineer. In addition,

listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:

•

Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.

This unit must be installed by a qualified electrician in accordance with NFPA 72, and National

and local Electrical and Fire Codes, under the direction of the authority having jurisdiction.

•

Do not connect this unit to the system when power is on.

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause , in certain situations,

permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing

protection.

•

After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper operation.

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in certain situations,

permanent hearing loss. The device should be installed far enough away from potential listeners

to limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal

Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which may be used regarding

permissible noise exposure levels.

•

Show these instructions to your Safety Engineer and then file them in a safe place and refer to

them when maintaining and/or reinstalling the unit.

After installation and completion of initial system test, a program of periodic testing of this device

must be established. Refer to NFPA 72G, local Fire Codes and the authority having jurisdiction

for this information.

•

Consult the authority having jurisdiction in your area regarding the proper use and installation of

this product.

I. GENERAL.

The AudioMaster Model AM300 and AM300GCX are 25 Vrms and 70 Vrms, indoor/outdoor

rated, selectable power output (8 and 15 watts) loudspeakers for use with fire alarm and general

signaling systems such as Federal Signal’s SelecTone® system. They are designed to reproduce

electronically generated warning tones, which command rapid recognition, and full range voice

communication. They are suitable for use in areas with high ambient noise levels. The speaker

projector is adjustable and may be repositioned to obtain desired sound distribution.

The AM300GCX is suitable for use in Class I, Groups A, B, C, & D, Division 2 and Class II,

Groups F & G, Division 2 classified and Class III locations.

II. SPECIFICATIONS.

Operating Voltage

Power Input (selectable)

Weight (approx.)

25 Vrms or 70 Vrms

8 W and 15 W

5 lb. (2.25kg)

-1-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Size

117/ " (302mm) high, 81/ " (206mm) wide,

8" (203mm) deep.

Construction

Aluminum enclosure painted with grey electrostatic

powder coating.

Amplifier housing sealed with neoprene rubber gasket.

Audibility information is shown in table 1.

III. INSTALLATION.

A. Unpacking.

After unpacking the speaker, examine it carefully for possible damage that may have occurred

in transit. If equipment has been damaged, immediately file a claim with the carrier stating

extent of damage. Carefully check all shipping labels and tags for special instructions before

removing or destroying them.

B. Mounting Arrangements (See figure 1).

CAUTION

To maintain the hazardous location rating of the Model AM300GCX, do not use the 7/8" knockout

(concealed conduit mounting).

The speaker can be mounted on any relatively flat surface. Conduit connection can be made to

1/2" threaded opening at bottom of housing or, in the case of the AM300, to 7/8" knockout in

rear of housing. After the mounting location and mounting method have been selected, proceed

with the applicable instructions below.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if an accumulation of water, snow, dust, etc.

resides in the speaker projector, severely reducing or preventing operation of this device.

Mount the unit so speaker projector is pointed horizontally or slightly downward.

1. Flat Surface Mounting.

a. Remove and retain the two screws that secure cover to housing. Remove the cover.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if any objects are in front of speaker,

severely reducing optimum sound distribution. For maximum effectiveness, ensure that the front

of the speaker is clear of obstructions.

b. Select the mounting location and place rear of housing against mounting surface.

c. Using the mounting holes (two (2) inside the Model AM300’s housing or four (4) in the

AM300GCX’s external mounting bracket) as a template, scribe drill position marks on

the mounting surface. See figure 1 for mounting hole locations and dimensions.

CAUTION

Before drilling holes in any surface, ensure that both sides of surface are clear of items

that could be damaged.

d. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with #10 screws appropriate for the type of

mounting surface material.

-2-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the projector is mishandled during

installation or over time. DO NOT rotate the projector more than 180 degrees or

internal speaker wiring may be damaged.

e. Reposition speaker projector if necessary to obtain desired sound coverage.

Loosen collar nut (see figure 1) and move projector to desired position.

f. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph III.C. Electrical Connections below

and make the necessary electrical connections.

2. Model AM300 Concealed Conduit Mounting.

a. Remove and retain the two screws that secure cover to housing. Remove the cover.

b. Remove the 7/8" knockout at rear of housing.

c. Install the conduit connection.

NOTE

If installation on an existing electrical box is desired, an optional Model CC adapter

plate is required.

d. Select the mounting location and place rear of housing against mounting surface.

e. Using the two (2) mounting holes as a template, scribe drill position marks on the

mounting surface. See figure 1 for mounting hole locations and dimensions.

CAUTION

Before drilling holes in any surface, ensure that both sides of surface are clear of items

that could be damaged.

f. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with #10 screws appropriate for the type of

mounting surface material.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the projector is mishandled during

installation or over time. DO NOT rotate the projector more than 180 degrees or

internal speaker wiring may be damaged.

g. Reposition speaker projector if necessary to obtain desired sound coverage. Loosen collar

nut (see figure 1) and move projector to desired position.

h. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph III.C. Electrical Connections below

and make the necessary electrical connections.

C. Electrical Connections.

DANGER

To avoid electrical shock, do not connect wires when circuits are energized.

NOTE

Audio wires should be sized properly by your licensed installation electrician for your service

application. This cable requires a twisted shielded pair with an 18AWG minimum and should

produce no more than 15% signal loss over the length of the cable run.

National Electrical Code as well as local codes must be adhered to in installation of these

models. All electrical wiring must be routed through approved conduit and fittings. The use of

metal conduit and fittings is required to provide grounding of the enclosure.

1. See figures 2 and 3. Connect the audio common (-) leads to the speaker’s common terminal

and audio positive (+) leads to desired wattage terminal.

-3-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

An uninsulated section of a single conductor must NOT be looped around a terminal and used as two

separate connections. NFPA 72 requires that the wire is severed to provide electrical

supervision of the connection.

2. The AM300 and AM300GCX are factory configured for 25 Vrms operation. If 70 Vrms

operation is desired, remove the wire leading to the speaker from the terminal marked 25V

and connect it to the terminal marked 70 V. (see figure 3).

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the housing is not closed properly.

To reduce the possibility of explosion, the Model AM300GCX’s housing cover must

be kept tight while circuits are energized.

3. Be sure the neoprene rubber cover gasket is properly seated in the housing groove and

reinstall housing cover.

IV. TESTING/OPERATING.

WARNING

Under certain conditions these devices are capable of producing sounds loud enough to cause

hearing damage. Adequate hearing protection should be worn if standing within close proximity

to device while testing. Recommendations in the OSHA Sound Level Standard

(29 CFR 1910) should not be exceeded.

A. After installation is complete, be sure to test the system to verify that each speaker operates

satisfactorily. If it is found that the unit is too loud for its location, a lower wattage tap may be

selected. Carefully remove the housing cover and move the positive (+) lead to a lower wattage

tap (see figure 3). Reinstall the housing cover and retest.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the housing is not closed properly.

To reduce the possibility of explosion, the Model AM300GCX’s housing cover must

be kept tight while circuits are energized.

B. After completion of initial system test, establish a program for periodic testing of this device.

C. Provide a copy of these instructions for the Safety Engineer, system operator(s) and

maintenance personnel.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS

Even if your warning system is operating properly, it may not be completely effective. People may

not hear or heed your warning signal. You must recognize this fact and ensure that your warning

signal achieves its intended effect through proper test/training sequences within your specific

application(s).

V. MAINTENANCE.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage,

serious injury, or death to you or others.

•

Read and understand all instructions before performing maintenance on this unit.

To reduce the risk of electrical shock, or ignition of hazardous atmospheres, do not perform

maintenance or service on this unit when circuits are energized.

•

Periodic checks should be made to ensure that effectiveness of this device has not been reduced

because speaker has become clogged with a foreign substance or because objects have been

placed in front of the speaker.

-4-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Any maintenance to this unit MUST be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with

NEC guidelines and local codes.

Never alter this unit in any manner. Safety in hazardous locations may be jeopardized if additional

openings or alterations are made to Model AM300GCX.

The nameplates, which contain cautionary or other information of importance to maintenance

personnel, should not be obscured if exterior of device is painted.

A. Periodically check this device to verify that there are no foreign substances in, or in front of,

the speaker which will reduce its effectiveness.

B. Testing should be periodically performed. Refer to NFPA 72G, local Fire Codes and the

authority having jurisdiction for information.

C. In the event a volume adjustment or other repair is required, be sure to refer to the Safety

Message For Maintenance Personnel before proceeding.

VI. SERVICE.

WARNING

Unauthorized repair/servicing of the unit may result in degradation of performance and/or property

damage, serious injury, or death to you or others. If a malfunctioning unit is encountered,

do not attempt any field repair/retrofit of parts.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems that

cannot be handled locally.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair, must be accompanied by a

Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A. can be obtained from the local Distributor or

Manufacturer’s Representative.

At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction, should

be given.

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-5-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN PARA PARLANTES AUDIOMASTER® SERIES C,

MODELO AM300 Y AM300GCX

PRECAUCION

El no seguir todas las instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad puede acarrear daños a la propiedad,

heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD A LOS INSTALADORES

La vida de personas depende de la instalación segura de nuestros productos. Es importante seguir

todas las instrucciones empacadas con los productos. Este dispositivo lo debe instalar un electricista

calificado que esté familiarizado con el Código Nacional Eléctrico y siga las normas así como los

códigos locales.

La selección del sitio de montaje del dispositivo, sus controles y la ruta del alambrado, se hará bajo

la dirección del Ingeniero de las facilidades y del Ingeniero de seguridad. Sin embargo, a

continuación se listan algunas otras instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad que se deben seguir:

•

Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de instalar u operar este equipo.

Esta unidad debe ser instalada por un electricista calificado de acuerdo con el NFPA 72 y los

códigos eléctricos y de incendio Nacionales y locales, bajo la dirección de la autoridad

competente.

•

No conecte esta unidad al sistema si está encendido.

Todos los parlantes efectivos de prevención producen sonidos fuertes, que pueden causar en

ciertas ocasiones, pérdida permanente del oído y se deben tomar las debidas precauciones tales

como usar protectores auditivos.

•

Después de instalado, asegúrese de que el sistema de sonido ofrece una operación apropiada.

Todos los parlantes efectivos de prevención producen sonidos tan fuertes que pueden causar

pérdida permanente del oído. El aparato debe ser instalado lo bastante lejos de los oyentes

potenciales para limitar su exposición mientras mantenga su efectividad. El código OSHA

1910.95 (EEUU) de regulación Federal del ruido, da las guías que deben usarse para los niveles

de exposición permisible al ruido.

•

Enseñe estas instrucciones a su Ingeniero de Seguridad y después archívelas en un lugar seguro y

consúltelas cuando le haga mantenimiento o reinstale la unidad.

Después de la instalación y prueba inicial del sistema, programe pruebas periódicas de este

aparato. Diríjase al NFPA 72G, los Códigos locales de incendio y la autoridad competente para

obtener esta información.

•

Consulte con la autoridad competente en su área, lo correspondiente al correcto uso e instalación

de este producto.

I. GENERAL.

Los AudioMaster® Modelos AM300 y AM300GCX son altoparlantes, de potencia de salida

seleccionable (0,5 a 15 vatios), para interior o intemperie, de 25Vrms y 70Vrms. Son para uso

como alarma de incendio y sistemas de señales generales como el sistema SelecTone de Federal

Signal. Están diseñados para reproducir tonos de alarma generados electrónicamente, los cuales

comandan un reconocimiento rápido y un amplio rango de comunicación de voces. Son ideales

para usar en áreas con un alto nivel de ruido. El proyector del parlante es ajustable y puede

reposicionarse para obtener la distribución de sonido deseada.

El AM300GCX es adecuado para utilizar en sitios Clase 1, Grupos A, B, C, y D, División 2, Clase

II, Grupos F y G, División 2 clasificados y Clase III.

II. ESPECIFICACIONES.

Voltaje de operación

Corriente de entrada (seleccionable)

Peso (aproximado)

25 Vrms o 70 Vrms

8W y 15W

5lbs (2,25 kg)

Tamaño

302mm (alto), 206mm (ancho), 203mm (largo)

-6-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Construcción

Caja de aluminio pintada con una capa de polvo

electrostático gris.

Caja del amplificador sellada con un empaque

de neopreno.

Información de Audibilidad se muestra en la tabla 1.

III. INSTALACION.

A. Desempaque.

Después de desempacar la unidad, examine cuidadosamente si hay daños de transporte. Si

hubo daños, haga de inmediato un reclamo al transportador, estableciendo el monto del daño.

Revise cuidadosamente todos los sellos de embarque y marquillas por instrucciones especiales

antes de removerlos o destruirlos.

B. Arreglos de montaje (Ver figura 1).

PREVENCION

Para mantener la clasificación de seguridad en áreas peligrosas del Modelo AM300GCX,

no use el disco removible de 7/8" (montaje en conduit embebido).

El parlante puede ser montado en una superficie relativamente plana. Las conexiones de

conduit pueden ser de rosca de 1/2" con entrada en la parte baja de la caja. También el Modelo

AM300 puede ser montado por un disco removible al fondo de la caja. Después de que la

localización de montaje y el método de montaje ha sido seleccionado, proceda con las

instrucciones que se listan a continuación.

PRECAUCION

Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias o la muerte podrían ocurrir si se presenta una acumulación de

agua, nieve , polvo, etc en el parlante, lo que reduce severamente o evita la operación del dispositivo.

Manatenga el parlante en posición horizontal o con una ligera inclinación hacia abajo.

1. Montaje en Superficie Plana.

a. Afloje los 2 tornillos que aseguran la tapa de la caja. Retire la tapa.

PRECAUCION

Daños a la propiedad, heridos graves o incluso su muerte o la de otros puede ocurrir si cualquier

objeto está en frente del parlante, reduciendo severamente la distribución óptima del sonido.

Para mayor efectividad, asegúrese de que el frente del parlante esté

despejado de cualquier obstáculo.

b. Seleccione la localización de montaje y coloque la parte posterior de la caja contra la

superficie de montaje.

c. Usando los huecos de montaje (dos dentro de la caja del Modelo AM300 o 4 en el soporte

de montaje del Modelo AM300GCX) como una plantilla, marque los puntos a perforar en

la superficie de montaje. Vea la figura 1 para localización y dimensión de los huecos de

montaje.

PREVENCION

Antes de perforar los huecos en cualquier superficie, asegúrese de que ambos lados de la superficie

están despejados de cualquier cosa que puede dañarse.

-7-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

d. Asegure la unidad a la superficie de montaje con tornillos #10 apropiados para el tipo de

material de la superficie de montaje.

PRECAUCION

Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso la muerte pueden ocurrir si el parlante es mal

manejado durante la instalación o con el tiempo. NO rote el parlante más de

180º o el cableado interno del parlante sufrirá daños.

e. Reposicione el parlante, si es necesario, para obtener la cobertura de sonido deseada.

Afloje la tuerca (ver figura 1) y mueva el proyector a la posición deseada.

f. Antes de reinstalar la tapa a la caja, lea el párrafo III. C las Conexiones Eléctricas que se

listan abajo y haga todas las conecciones eléctricas necesarias.

2. Montaje en Conduit Embebido del Modelo AM300.

a. Retire y conserve los dos tornilos que aseguran la tapa a la caja. Retire la tapa.

b. Retire el disco variable de 7/8" de la parte posterior de la caja.

c. Instale la conexión del conduit.

NOTA

Si se desea una instalación en una caja eléctrica ya existente, se requiere una

plato adaptador opcional Modelo CC.

d. Seleccione la localización de montaje y coloque la parte posterior de la caja contra la

superficie de montaje.

e. Use los dos huecos de montaje como una platina, marque los puntos a perforar en la

superficie de montaje. Vea la figura 1 para las dimensiones y localización de los huecos

de montaje.

PRECAUCION

Antes de perforar los huecos en cualquier superficie, asegúrese de que ambos lados

de la superficie están libres de cosas que se puedan dañar.

f. Asegure la unidad a la superficie de montaje con tornillos #10 apropiados para el tipo de

material de la superficie de montaje.

PREVENCION

Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros pueden ocurrir si el proyector

no se maneja adecuadamente durante la instalación o cualquier tiempo después. NO rote el

proyector más de 180º o el cableado interno del parlante puede sufrir daños.

g. Reposicione el proyector si es necesario para obtener la cobertura de sonido deseada.

Afloje la tuerca (ver figura 1) y mueva el proyector a la posición deseada.

h. Antes de reinstalar la tapa de la caja, lea el parágrafo III.C, las conexiones eléctricas que

se listan abajo y haga todas las conecciones eléctricas necesarias.

C. Conexiones Eléctricas.

PELIGRO

Para evitar descargas eléctricas, no conecte cables cuando los circuitos estén energizados.

NOTA

Los cables de audio deben tener el tamaño correcto seleccionado por un electricista instalador

autorizado para su aplicación de servicio. Este cable requiere un par trenzado blindado con un cable

calibre 18AWG como mínimo y debe producir menos de 15% de pérdida de señal

a lo largo del tramo del cable.

Durante la instalación de estos modelos, deben seguirse los Códigos Eléctricos Nacionales así

como los locales. Todo el cableado debe hacerse a través de conduit y accesorios aprobados.

Estos sería de metal si van a servir como tierra de la caja.

-8-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Vea las figuras 2 y 3. Conecte las terminales negativas (-) de audio a la terminal negativa

del parlante y las terminales positivas (+) de audio a la terminal de potencia deseada.

AVISO

Una sección sin aislante con un solo conductor NO debe hacer circuito alrededor de un terminal

y sea usado como dos conexiones separadas. La NFPA 72 require que el cable sea cortado

para dar supervisión eléctrica a la conexión.

2. Los Modelos AM300 y AM300GCX están configurados de fábrica para 25Vrms de

operación. Si se desean 70 Vrms de operación, remueva el extremo del cable del parlante

de la terminal marcada como 25V y conéctelo a la terminal marcada como 70V (ver

figura 2).

PREVENCION

Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros puede ocurrir, si la caja no se

cierra adecuadamente. Para reducir la posibilidad de explosión, la tapa de la caja del Modelo

AM300GCX se debe mantener bien cerrado mientras los circuitos estén energizados.

3. Asegúrese de que el empaque de neopreno de la caja está bien colocado en la ranura de la

caja y reinstale la tapa de la caja.

IV. PRUEBA/OPERACION.

PRECAUCION

Bajo ciertas condiciones estos dispositivos son capaces de producir sonidos suficientemente fuertes

como para causar daños auditivos. Se debe usar adecuada protección auditiva si se va a premanecer

dentro de cierta proximidad al dispositivo cuando se está probando. Las recomendaciones de la

OSHA (EEUU) con respeto a los Niveles Estándares de Ruido (29CFR 1910) no se deben exceder.

A. Después de que la instalación se ha terminado, prueba el sistema para verificar que cada

parlante opera satisfactoriamente. Si se encuentra que la unidad es muy ruidosa para la

localización, se debe seleccionar una corriente más baja. Cuidadosamente remueva la tapa de

la caja y mueva la terminal positiva (+) para bajar la corriente (ver figura 2). Reinstale la tapa

de la caja y prueba el sistema nuevamente.

PRECAUCION

Daños a la propiedad, heridas serias o incluso su muerte o la de otros puede ocurrir si la caja no se

cierra adecuadamente. Para reducir la posibilidad de explosión, la tapa de la caja del Modelo

AM300GCX se debe mantener bien cerrado mientras los circuitos están energizados.

B. Después de terminar la prueba inicial del sistema, establezca un programa periódico de prueba

de este dispositivo

C. Provea una copia de estas instrucciones al Ingeniero de Seguridad, los operadores del sistema y

el personal de mantenimiento.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD A LOS OPERADORES

Aún si su sistema está operando adecuadamente, el puede no ser completamente efectivo. La

gente puede no oir o atender su señal de alarma. Usted debe detectar este hecho y asegurarse de

que la señal de alarma alcance el efecto deseado por pruebas o simulacros apropiados dentro de su

aplicación específica.

V. MANTENIMIENTO.

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA EL PERSONAL DE MANTENIMIENTO

El no seguir todas las precauciones e instrucciones que se listan a continuación, puede resultan en

daños a la propiedad, heridas serias e incluso su muerte o la de otros .

-9-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de operar este equipo.

Para reducir el riesgo de descarga eléctrica, o ignición de atmósferas peligrosas, no realice

mantenimiento a esta unidad cuando los circuitos estén energizados.

•

Se deben realizar pruebas periódicas para asegurar que la efectividad de este dispositivo no se ha

reducido por que el parlante se bloquea con sustancias extrañas o hay objetos extraños delante del

parlante.

•

Cualquier mantenimiento a la unidad TIENE que ser hecho por un electricista entrenado de

acuerdo con el NEC y los códigos locales.

Nunca altere la unidad de manera alguna. La seguridad en sitios de alto riesgo puede ponerse en

peligro si se adicionan agujeros o se hacen alteraciones al Modelo AM300GCX.

La placa, que puede tener información de importancia o precauciones para el personal de

mantenimiento, no se debera cubrir con pintura si la carcaza exterior se pinta.

A. Periódicamente revise este dispositivo para verificar que no hay sustancias extrañas dentro, o

en frente, del parlante lo que reduce su efectividad.

B. Se debe realizar una prueba periódica. Lea NFPA 72G, códigos locales de incendios o

autoridad competente para sumistrar esta información.

C. En el evento de que se requiera un ajuste de volumen, o una reparación, antes de proceder

diríjase al Mensaje de Seguridad para el Personal de Mantenimiento.

VI. SERVICIO.

PRECAUCION

Reparación o servicio no autorizado de la unidad puede resultar en degradación del desempeño

y/o daños a la propiedad, heridas graves e incluso su muerte o la de otros. Si se encuentra un mal

funcionamiento de la unidad, no intente ninguna reparación en el sitio/o reutilizar partes usadas.

La Federal Signal Corporation le hará servicio a su equipo o proveerá asistencia técnica a los

problemas que no se puedan manejar localmente.

Cualquier unidad que se devuelva a Federal Signal para servicio, inspección o reparación, debe

acompañarse de una autorización de “material devuelto” (R.M.A.). Esta R.M.A. se puede

obtener con el representante o distribuidor local del fabricante y se adjuntará una breve

explicación de la necesidad del servicio o la naturaleza del mal funcionamiento.

Dirija todas las comunicaciones y envíos a:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-10-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION POUR LA SÉRIE C, MODÈLES AM300 et

AM300GCX AUDIOMASTER@ SPEAKER

AVERTISSEMENT

Le non-respect de toutes les précautions et instructions de sécurité peut résulter en dommages aux

biens, en blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.

MESSAGE DE SECURITE AUX INSTALLATEURS

Ces vies humaines dépendent de votre installation de nos produits en sécurité. Il est important de

lire, comprendre et suivre toutes les instructions expédiées avec ce produit. Ce dispositif doit être

installé par un électricien professionnel qui est complètement au courant du Code Electrique

National et respectera les recommandations NEC ainsi que les codes locaux.

Le choix de l’endroit de montage du dispositif, de ses commandes et du passage des câbles doit être

effectué sous la direction de l’ingénieur des services électriques et de l’ingénieur de sécurité. De

plus, sont énumérées ci-dessous quelques autres instructions et précautions de sécurité

importantes que vous devez suivre:

•

Lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d’installer ou d’utiliser ce matériel.

Cet appareil doit être installé par un électricien professionnel conformément à NFPA 72, et aux

codes électriques et incendie nationaux et locaux, sous la direction de l’autorité qui a la

juridiction.

•

Ne connectez pas cette unité au système si la tension est présente.

Tous les haut-parleurs effectifs d’avertissement produisent des sons puissants qui peuvent causer

dans certaines situations une perte permanente de l’ouïe. Vous devez prendre des précautions

appropriées comme le port de protection de l’ouïe.

•

Après installation, essayez le système de signalisation d’urgence pour vérifier que son

fonctionnement est correct.

Tous les haut-parleurs d’avertissement effectifs produisent des sons forts qui peuvent causer dans

certaines situations la perte de l’ouïe. Le dispositif doit être installé suffisamment loin des

auditeurs potentiels pour limiter leur exposition tout en maintenant son efficacité. Le code OSHA

de Federal Regulations 1910.95 (Norme de bruit) donne des recommandations qui peuvent être

utilisées concernant les niveaux d’exposition au bruit permis.

•

Montrez ces instructions à votre ingénieur de sécurité puis classez-les dans un endroit sûr et

référez-vous à elles lorsque vous entretenez ou réinstallez l’appareil.

Après installation et fin du test initial du système, un programme d’essai périodique de ce

dispositif doit être établi. Référez-vous à NFPA 72G, codes locaux d’incendie et à

l’administration qui a la juridiction pour ces informations.

•

Consultez l’administration qui a la juridiction dans votre zone concernant l’utilisation et

l’installation correctes de ce produit.

I. GENERALITES.

Les AudioMaster Modèles AM300 et AM300GCX sont des haut-parleurs de 25 Vrms et 70 Vrms,

pour utilisation à l’intérieur et à l’extérieur, à sortie de puissance sélectionnable (0,5 à 15 watts)

pour utilisation avec alarme incendie et systèmes de signalisation généraux comme le système

SelecTone® de Federal Signal. Ils sont conàus pour reproduire des tonalités d’avertissement

générées électroniquement, qui commandent une reconnaissance rapide, et communication vocale

sur toute la gamme. Ils conviennent pour utilisation dans des zones avec niveaux de bruit ambiant

élevés. Le cornet du haut-parleur est ajustable et peut être repositionné pour obtenir la répartition

sonore désirée.

Le modèle Am300GCX convient pour les emplacements de Classe I, groupes A, B, C, et D,

division 2 et de classe II, groupes F et G, division 2 classifiée et de Classe III.

-11-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

II. SPECIFICATIONS.

Tension de service

Puissance à l’entrée (sélectionnable)

Poids

25 Vrms ou 70 Vrms

8W and 15W

5 lbs (2,25kg)

Dimensions

11-7/8" (302 mm) de hauteur x 8-1/8" (206 mm) de

largeur x 8" (203 mm) de profondeur.

Construction

Enceinte d’aluminium peinte avec un revêtement de

poudre électrostatique grise.

Carter d’amplificateur scellé avec joint

caoutchouc néoprène.

Les informations sur l’audibilité sont données au tableau 1

III. INSTALLATION.

A. Déballage.

Après déballage du haut-parleur, inspectez-le pour voir s’il a été endommagé pendant le

transport. S’il a été endommagé, faites une déclaration immédiatement auprès du transporteur

en indiquant les dommages. Vérifiez soigneusement toutes les enveloppes, les étiquettes

d’expédition et les étiquettes volantes avant de les retirer ou les détruire.

B. Dispositions de Montage (Voir figure 1).

ATTENTION

Pour maintenir la classification pour endroits dangereux du modèle AM300GCX, n’utilisez pas

le trou à déboucher de 7/8" (montage à conduit caché).

Le haut-parleur peut être monté sur toute surface relativement plate. La connexion conduit peut

être faite avec l’ouverture taraudée de 1/2" en bas du carter ou dans le cas du AM300, à la

pièce chassée de 7/8" à l’arrière du carter. Après sélection de l’emplacement de montage et de

la méthode de montage, procédez avec les instructions applicables ci-dessous.

AVERTISSEMENT

Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si une accumulation

d’eau, de neige, de poussières, etc. se trouvent dans le cornet du haut-parleur, réduisant gravement

ou empêchant le fonctionnement de ce dispositif. Montez l’unité de manière que le cornet du

haut-parleur soit dirigé horizontalement ou légèrement vers le bas.

1. Montage sur Surface Plane.

a. Retirez et gardez les deux vis qui fixent le couvercle sur le carter. Retirez le carter.

AVERTISSEMENT

Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si des objets se

trouvent devant le haut-parleur réduisant gravement la répartition optimale de son. Pour une

efficacité maximale, assurez-vous que l’avant du haut-parleur est dégagé de toute obstruction.

b. Sélectionnez l’emplacement de montage et placez l’arrière du carter contre la surface de

montage.

c. A l’aide des trous de montage (2) à l’intérieur du carter du Modèle AM300 ou quatre (4)

dans le support de montage externe du AM300GCX comme gabarit, marquez les

positions de perçage sur la surface de montage. Voir figure 1 pour les emplacements des

trous de montage et les dimensions.

-12-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ATTENTION

Avant de percer des trous dans une surface, assurez-vous que les deux côtés de la surface sont

dégagés de tout élément qui pourrait être endommagé.

d. Fixez l’appareil à la surface de montage avec les 10 vis appropriées pour le type de

matière de la surface de montage.

AVERTISSEMENT

Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le cornet est

malmené pendant l’installation ou plus tard. Ne faites pas tourner le cornet de plus de 180º,

sinon le câblage intérieur du haut-parleur peut être endommagé.

e. Repositionnez le cornet du haut-parleur si nécessaire pour obtenir la couverture sonore

désirée. Desserrez l’écrou à embase (voir figure 1) et déplacez le cornet jusqu’à la

position désirée.

f. Avant de réinstaller le couvercle du carter, lisez le paragraphe III.C Connexions

électriques ci-dessous et faites les connexions électriques nécessaires.

2. Montage sur Conduit Caché Modèle AM300.

a. Retirez et gardez les deux vis qui fixent le couvercle au carter. Démonter le carter.

b. Enlever la pièce chassée 7/8" à l’arrière du carter.

c. Installez la connexion du conduit.

NOTE

Si l’installation sur un boîtier électrique existant est désirée, une plaque adaptateur

Modèle CC, en option, est nécessaire.

d. Sélectionnez l’endroit de montage et placez l’arrière du carter contre la surface du

montage.

e. A l’aide des deux trous de montage comme gabarit, marquez des positions de perçage sur

la surface de montage. Voir la figure 1 pour les emplacements des trous de montage et les

dimensions.

ATTENTION

Avant de percer des trous dans une surface, assurez-vous que les deux côtés de la surface sont

dégagés de tout élément qui pourrait être endommagé.

f. Fixez l’appareil à la surface de montage avec les 10 vis appropriées pour le type de

matière de la surface de montage.

WARNING

Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le cornet est

malmené pendant l’installation ou plus tard. Ne faites pas tourner le cornet de plus de 180º,

sinon le câblage intérieur du haut-parleur peut être endommagé.

g. Repositionnez le cornet du haut-parleur si nécessaire pour obtenir la couverture sonore

désirée. Desserrez l’écrou à collerette (voir figure 1) et déplacez le cornet jusqu’à la

position désirée.

h. Avant de réinstaller le couvercle du carter, lisez le paragraphe III.C Connexions

électriques ci-dessous et faites les connexions électriques nécessaires.

C. Connexions Electriques.

DANGER

Pour éviter des chocs électriques, ne connectez pas les fils si les circuits sont sous tension.

NOTE

Les fils audio doivent être choisis par votre électricien d’installation agréé pour votre application de

service. Ce câble exige une paire de fils torsadés et blindés d’un mimum de 18AWG et devrait

produire au plus une perte de signal de 15% sur la longueur du câble.

-13-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Le National Electrical Code ainsi que les codes locaux doivent être respectés lors de

l’installation de ces modèles. Tout le câblage électrique doit être passé à travers des conduits et

raccords approuvés. L’utilisation de conduits et raccords métalliques est nécessaire pour

permettre la mise à la terre de l’enceinte.

1. Voir figures 2 et 3. Connectez les câbles audio commun (-) à la borne commune du haut-

parleur et le positif audio (+) à la borne de puissance désirée.

AVERTISSEMENT

Une partie non isolée d’un conducteur unique ne doit PAS être mise en boucle autour d’une borne et

utilisée comme étant deux connexions séparées. NFPA 72 exige que le fil soit coupé pour

permettre la supervision électrique de la connexion.

2. Les AM300 et AM300GCX sont configurés en usine pour fonctionnement en 25 Vrms. Si un

fonctionnement en 70 Vrms est désiré, retirez le fil allant au haut-parleur depuis la borne

marquée 25V et connectez-le à la borne marquée 70V (voir figure 3).

AVERTISSEMENT

Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le carter n’est pas

fermé correctement. Pour réduire la possibilité d’explosion, le couvercle de carter du Modèle

AM300GCX doit être maintenu fermé étanche pendant que les circuits sont sous tension.

3. Assurez-vous que le joint de couvercle en caoutchouc Néoprène est bien assis dans la

rainure du carter et réinstallez le couvercle du carter.

IV. ESSAI/FONCTIONNEMENT.

AVERTISSEMENT

Dans certaines situations, ces dispositifs peuvent produire des sons suffisamment forts pour causer

des dommages à l’ouïe. Une protection adéquate de l’ouïe doit être portée si on est très près du

dispositif pendant les essais. Les recommandations de la Norme OSHA de niveau de son

(29 CFR 1910) ne doit pas être dépassées.

A. Une fois l’installation terminée, n’oubliez pas d’essayer le système pour vérifier que chaque

haut-parleur fonctionne de manière satisfaisante. Si on trouve que l’appareil est trop fort pour

son emplacement, une prise de puissance plus faible peut être sélectionnée. Retirez

soigneusement le couvercle de carter et déplacez le câble positif (à) pour le mettre sur une prise

de puissance plus faible (voir figure ). Réinstallez le couvercle de carter et refaites l’essai.

AVERTISSEMENT

Des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles peuvent avoir lieu si le carter n’est pas

fermé correctement. Pour réduire la possibilité d’explosion, le couvercle de carter du Modèle

AM300GCX doit être maintenu fermé étanche pendant que les circuits sont sous tension.

B. Après fin de l’essai initial du système, établissez un programme pour essai périodique de ce

dispositif.

C. Fournissez une copie de ces instructions à l’ingénieur de sécurité, à l’opérateur du système et

au personnel d’entretien.

MESSAGE DE SECURITE AUX OPERATEURS

Même si votre système d’avertissement fonctionne correctement, il peut ne pas être complètement

efficace. Les gens peuvent ne pas voir, entendre ou respecter votre signal d’avertissement. Vous

devez reconnaître ce fait et vous assurer que votre signal d’avertissement a l’effet voulu par des

séquences correctes d’essai/formation dans votre application spécifique.

-14-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

V. ENTRETIEN.

MESSAGE DE SECURITE AU PERSONNEL D’ENTRETIEN

Le non-respect des précautions et instructions de sécurité peut en résulter en dommages aux biens,

blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.

•

Lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d’utiliser ce système.

Pour réduire le risque de chocs électriques ou un allumage d’atmosphères dangereuses,

n’effectuez pas d’entretien ou de service sur cet appareil si les circuits sont sous tension.

•

Des vérifications périodiques doivent être faites pour assurer que l’efficacité de ce dispositif n’a

pas été réduite parce que le haut-parleur s’est bouché avec des matières étrangères ou parce que

des objets ont été placés devant le haut-parleur.

•

Tout entretien de cet appareil DOIT être fait par un électricien professionnel conformément aux

recommandations NEC et aux codes locaux.

Ne jamais modifier l’unité de quelle que manière que ce soit. La sécurité dans des lieux

dangereux peut être mise en cause si des ouvertures supplémentaires ou d’autres modifications

sont faites au Modèle AM300GCX.

•

Les plaques de caractéristiques, qui contiennent des informations d’avertissement ou autre,

importantes pour le personnel d’entretien, ne doivent pas être cachées si l’extérieur du dispositif

est peint.

A. Vérifiez périodiquement ce dispositif pour vérifier qu’il n’y a pas de produits étrangers dans ou

devant le haut-parleur qui puissent réduire son efficacité.

B. Un essai doit être effectué périodiquement. Référez-vous à NFPA 72G, aux codes locaux

incendie et à l’administration qui a la juridiction pour ces informations.

C. Au cas où un ajustage de volume ou une autre réparation serait nécessaire, assurez-vous de

vous référer au message de sécurité pour le personnel d’entretien avant de continuer.

VI. SERVICE.

AVERTISSEMENT

Des réparations ou un service non autorisé de cet appareil peuvent résulter en dégradation des

performances et/ou dommages aux biens, blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.

Si vous découvrez un appareil ne fonctionnant pas bien, n’essayez pas de réparer sur

place ou de remplacer des pièces.

L’usine de Federal Signal fera le service de votre matériel et fournira une assistance technique

pour tout problème qui ne puisse être traité localement.

Toutes les unités renvoyées à Federal Signal pour un service, inspection ou réparation doivent être

accompagnées d’une autorisation de retour de matériel. Cette R.M.A. peut être obtenue auprès du

distributeur local ou du représentant du fabricant.

A ce moment, une courte explication du service demandé, ou la nature du mauvais

fonctionnement doit être donnée.

Adressez toutes les communications et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-15-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1.

Power

Tap

UL Omnidirectional

Sound Level @ 10' dB(A)

Sound Level dB(A)

@ 10' on axis

8 watt

106

109

15 watt

Tabla 1.

Corriente

Nivel de Sonido UL

@ 10' dB (A)

Sonido

dB (A)

8 watt

106

109

15 watt

Tableau 1.

Prise de

Niveau de Son

Puissance

UL @ 10' dB(A)

Acoustique dB(A)

8 watt

106

109

15 watt

-16-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9A02-67B

-17-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AM300

AM300GCX

RED

BLK

290A2773B

English

A. Speaker models

Español

A. Parlante modelos

Français

A. Haut-parleur modeles

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

YEL

290A2627-08B

English

A. NOTE: Letters appear on this side of terminal strip. Shown here on mounting

bracket for reference only.

B. Speaker internal yellow lead to be connected to 25V or 70V terminal,

depending upon external signal source voltage.

C. Positive (+) leads to 1 of 2 available wattage terminals.

D. Common (-) leads to common terminal.

* Not Used

Español

A. NOTA: Las letras aparecen en este lado de la regleta de conexiones. Se muestran

aquí en el soporte de montaje solo como referencia

B. El conector amarillo interno del altavoz debe de conectarse al terminal de

25V o 70V dependiendo del voltaje de la fuente de señal externa.

C. Conectores positivos (+) a 1 de los 2 terminales de vatiaje

D. Conectores comunes (-) al terminal común

* NO USADO

Français

A. NOTE:-Les lettres sur ce cote de la bande de borne montrees ici sur le supporte

de montage sont donnees uniquement pour reference.

B. Le cable interne jaune du haut-parleur est a etre connecte sur la borne de

25V ou 70V (en fonction de la tension de source de signal externe)

C. Les cables de champ positif (+) sur les bornes de 1 a 2 de puissance

en watt disponibles.

D. Les cables communs (-) sur la borne commune.

* PAS UTILISÉ

2561140E

REV. E 4/00

Printed in U.S.A.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODELS AMSF -25 AND AMSS-25

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS F OR

MODELS AMSF -25 AND AMSS-25

MODELOS AMSF -25 Y AMSS-25

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN Y SERVICIO PARA

LOS MODELOS AMSF -25 Y AMSS-25

MODÈLES AMSF -25 ET AMSS-25

INSTRUCTIONS DE MONTAGE ET D'ENTRETIEN P OUR

LES MODÈLES AMSF -25 ET AMSS-25

Address all communications and shipments to:

Dirija todos la correspondencia y envíos a:

Adressez toutes les communiations et expéditions à:

F EDERAL SIGNAL CORP ORATION

Electr ica l P r od u cts Division

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR

MODELS AMSF-25 AND AMSS-25

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS, USERS AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

It is important to follow all instructions shipped with this product. This device is

to be installed by a trained electrician who is thoroughly familiar with the National

Electrical Code and will follow NEC Guidelines as well as local codes.

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the routing

of the wiring is to be accomplished under the direction of the facilities engineer and the

safety engineer. In addition, listed below are some other important safety instructions

and precautions you should follow:

•

This is not a Listed safety device and is not intended to be used as such.

Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this

equipment.

•

Disconnect power before connecting or doing any maintenance on this

device.

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause in

certain situations, permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate

precautions such as wearing hearing protection.

•

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in

certain situations, permanent hearing loss. The device should be

installed far enough away from potential listeners to limit their

exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of

Federal Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which

may be used regarding permissible noise exposure levels.

•

After testing is complete, provide a copy of this instruction sheet to all

operating personnel.

Establish a procedure to routinely check the speaker installation for

integrity and proper operation. Any maintenance must be performed by

a trained electrician in accordance with NEC guidelines and local codes.

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property

damage, serious injury, or death to you or others.

A. Descr ip tion .

The Federal Signal models AMSF-25 & AMSS-25 are heavy-duty, 8 ohm, round

speakers for use in public address or paging systems. These speakers are designed to

reproduce full-range voice communication. Both speakers are constructed of spun

aluminum. The speaker wiring connections are enclosed in a dust-tight and moisture-

proof, gasketed rear cover. All external surfaces are sealed with a metallic gray powder

coat paint.

-1-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B. Sp ecifica tion s.

Frequency Response:

Power Handling:

Nominal Impedance:

800 – 5k Hz

25 Watts

8 ohms

AMSF -25

AMSS-25

Width:

7.25" (18.4 cm)

4.1" (10.4 cm)

5.0" (12.7 cm)

5.5 lbs. (2.7 kg)

6.25" (15.9 cm)

8.4" (21.3 cm)

4.1" (10.4 cm)

5.1" (12.9 cm)

6.0 lbs. (2.5 kg)

Height:

Depth [without cover]:

Depth [with cover]:

Shipping Weight:

C. Un p a ck in g.

After unpacking the unit , examine it for damage that may have occurred in

transit. If the equipment has been damaged, do not attempt to install or operate it. File

a claim immediately with the carrier stating the extent of the damage. Carefully check

all envelopes, shipping labels, and tags before removing or destroying them.

D. Mou n tin g.

CAUTION

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the

routing of the wiring is to be accomplished under the direction of the facilities

and the safety engineer.

Mod el AMSF -25

Speaker model AMSF-25 is intended for flush mounting. There are six mounting

holes approximately 0.22" (5.6mm) in diameter in its outer flange. See figure 1. Install

the speaker behind a 6-1/8" (155.6 mm) hole. A small bead of silicone rtv around the

outer flange is recommended when installing this unit into a NEMA 4X rated enclo-

sure. Hardware for mounting the speaker shall be provided by the installer. The rear

cover (see figure 2) is equipped with a liquid-tight strain relief. This strain relief will

accommodate cable diameters between 0.18" (4.6mm) and 0.31" (7.9 mm). Securely

attach the cover to the speaker using the provided fasteners.

Mod el AMSS-25

Speaker model AMSS-25 is equipped with a serrated swivel mounting bracket

with a locking nut that allows the speaker to be adjusted through an angle of 90°. The

speaker mounting bracket is intended to be mounted on any relatively flat and rigid

surface. There are three mounting holes present in the base of the mount. See figure 3.

Hardware for mounting the speaker shall be provided by the installer. The rear cover

(see figure 2) is equipped with a liquid-tight strain relief. This strain relief will

accommodate cable diameters between 0.18" (4.6mm) and 0.31" (7.9 mm). Securely

attach the cover to the speaker using the provided fasteners.

-2-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

This unit is heavy and should be mounted on a rigid surface capable of

supporting the weight of the speaker.

E. Electr ica l Con n ection s.

WARNING

Do not connect wires when power is applied.

Audio wires should be sized properly by your licensed installation electrician for

your service application. Connect the positive (+) audio line to the terminal with the

red indicator.

WARNING

This speaker is an 8-ohm device and should not be connected to a 25 VRMS

or a 70 VRMS line without the use of a step-down transformer. Failure to

follow these instructions may result in property damage, serious injury, or

death to you or others.

F. Ser vice.

CAUTION

Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance

with NEC guidelines and local codes.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with

any problems that cannot be handled locally.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair must be

accompanied by a Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A can be obtained from the

local Distributor or Manufacturer’s Representative.

At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the

malfunction, should be given.

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-3-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN Y SERVICIO PARA

LOS MODELOS AMSF-25Y AMSS-25

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA LOS INSTALADORES,

USUARIOS Y PERSONAL DE MANTENIMIENTO

Es importante seguir todas las instrucciones incluidas con este producto. Esta

unidad debe ser instalada por un electricista bien adiestrado que conozca completamente

todos los requisitos del Código Eléctrico Nacional (NEC son las siglas en inglés) y que

siga las pautas del NEC y de los códigos locales.

La selección del lugar de montaje para esta unidad y sus controles, y de las rutas

para sus cables, deberá ser llevada a cabo bajo la dirección del ingeniero de planta y del

ingeniero de seguridad. Abajo se indican otras importantes instrucciones de seguridad y

precauciones que debe seguir:

•

Esta no es una unidad clasificada como de seguridad y no se debe usar

como tal.

Lea y entienda bien todas las instrucciones antes de instalar u operar este

equipo.

Desconecte la electricidad antes instalar o hacer cualquier tipo de

mantenimiento en esta unidad.

Todos los altoparlantes usados en este sistema de alarma producen

sonidos muy intensos que pueden causar, en ciertas situaciones, una

pérdida permanente del oído. Usted debe tomar precauciones apropiadas,

tales como usar protección para los oídos.

•

Todos los altoparlantes usados en este sistema de alarma producen

sonidos muy intensos que pueden causar, en ciertas situaciones, una

pérdida permanente del oído. Esta unidad debe ser instalada

suficientemente lejos de las personas para limitar la exposición a los

ruidos intensos, pero manteniendo siempre la eficacia del sistema. La

norma de ruidos 1910.95 del Código de Reglas Federales de OSHA

contiene pautas que se deben usar para determinar los niveles permisibles

de exposición a sonidos intensos.

•

Después de completar las pruebas, entregue una copia de esta hoja de

instrucciones a todo el personal de operación.

Establezca un procedimiento para inspeccionar rutinariamente la

instalación de los altoparlantes, con el fin de asegurar su integridad y

funcionamiento correcto. Cualquier trabajo de mantenimiento se deberá

ejecutar por un electricista adiestrado y de acuerdo con las pautas del

NEC y de los códigos locales.

La falla en tomar todas las precauciones y seguir todas las instrucciones de

seguridad puede causar daños a la propiedad y lesiones serias, que pueden llegar hasta

la muerte de usted o de otras personas.

A. Descr ip ción .

Los modelos AMSF-25 y AMSS-25 de Federal Signal son altoparlantes redondos con

una impedancia de 8 ohmios para servicio pesado, utilizados generalmente en servicios

de amplificación pública o de llamadas a personas. Estos altoparlantes han sido

diseñados para reproducir la gama completa de frecuencias usadas en la comunicación

por voz. Ambos altoparlantes son fabricados de aluminio centrifugado. Las conexiones

del altoparlante están contenidas bajo una cubierta, protegida contra el polvo y la

humedad por un empaque. Todas las superficies externas están selladas con una pintura

protectora de polvo de color gris metálico.

-4-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B. Esp ecifica cion es.

Frecuencias de operación:

Capacidad de potencia:

Impedancia nominal:

800 Hz - 5 kHz

25 Vatios

8 ohmios

AMSF -25

AMSS-25

Anchura:

Altura:

7,25" (18,4 cm)

6,25" (15,9 cm)

8,4" (21,3 cm)

4,1" (10,4 cm)

5,1" (12,9 cm)

6,0 lbs (2,5 kg)

Profundidad [sin cubierta]: 4,1" (10,4 cm)

Profundidad [con cubierta]: 5,0" (12,7 cm)

Peso de embarque:

5,5 lbs (2,7 kg)

C. F or m a d e d esem p a ca r la u n id a d .

Después de desempacar la unidad, examínela para ver si tiene algún daño ocurrido

durante el tránsito. Si el equipo se ha dañado, no trate de instalarlo ni de operarlo.

Presente una reclamación inmediatamente ante la compañía transportadora, indicando

la naturaleza y extensión del daño. Inspeccione cuidadosamente todos los sobres,

etiquetas y otros documentos de embarque antes de quitarlos del equipo o destruirlos.

D. Mon ta je.

PRECAUCIÓN

La selección del lugar de montaje para la unidad, sus controles y la ruta para

sus cables, deberá ser hecha bajo la dirección del ingeniero de planta y del

ingeniero de seguridad.

Mod elo AMSF -25

El altoparlante modelo AMSF-25 ha sido diseñado para montaje al ras. El

altoparlante tiene seis agujeros de montaje de aproximadamente 0,22" (5,6 mm) de

diámetro en su borde exterior. Vea la Figura 1. Instale el altoparlante detrás de un

agujero de 6-1/8" (155,6 mm) de diámetro. Se recomienda aplicar una pequeña cantidad

de silicona rtv, alrededor del borde exterior, cuando se instale este altoparlante dentro de

una caja con clasificación NEMA 4X. Los herrajes necesarios para montar el altoparlante

deberán ser suministrados por el instalador. La cubierta exterior (vea la Figura 2) está

equipada con un dispositivo de alivio de tensión para el cable, que también evita la

entrada de líquidos. Este dispositivo puede acomodar cables con diámetros entre 0,18"

(4,6 mm) y 0,31" (7,9 mm). Instale la cubierta en forma segura al altoparlante, usando

los fijadores suministrados.

Mod elo AMSS-25

El altoparlante modelo AMSS-25 está equipado con un brazo giratorio de montaje

que tiene una tuerca de presión y permite que el altoparlante pueda ser ajustado en un

ángulo de hasta 90°. El brazo de montaje del altoparlante se puede montar sobre

cualquier superficie rígida y relativamente plana. La base del brazo de montaje tiene

tres agujeros. Vea la Figura 3. Los herrajes necesarios para montar el altoparlante

deberán ser suministrados por el instalador. La cubierta exterior (vea la Figura 2) está

equipada con un dispositivo de alivio de tensión para el cable, que también evita la

entrada de líquidos. Este dispositivo puede acomodar cables con diámetros entre 0,18"

(4,6 mm) y 0,31" (7,9 mm). Instale la cubierta en forma segura al altoparlante, usando

los fijadores suministrados.

-5-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVERTENCIA

Esta unidad es pesada y se debe montar sobre una superficie rígida que sea

capaz de soportar el peso del altoparlante.

E. Con exion es eléctr ica s.

ADVERTENCIA

No conecte los alambres mientras la electricidad esté conectada.

Los alambres de audio deben tener un tamaño adecuado, que deberá ser

determinado por el electricista licenciado a cargo de la instalación, para el tipo

de servicio deseado. Conecte el alambre positivo (+) de audio al terminal que

tiene el indicador rojo.

ADVERTENCIA

Este altoparlante es una unidad de 8 ohmios y no debe ser conectado a una

línea de 25 Voltios r.m.s. o de 70 Voltios r.m.s. sin el uso de un transformador

reductor de voltaje. La falla en seguir estas instrucciones puede resultar en

daños a la propiedad, lesiones serias, o hasta la muerte para usted o para otras

personas.

F. Ser vicio.

PRECAUCIÓN

Cualquier trabajo de mantenimiento deberá ser llevado a cabo por un

electricista adiestrado de acuerdo con las pautas del NEC y los códigos

locales.

Federal Signal le dará servicio a su equipo o le suministrará asistencia técnica con

cualquier problema que no pueda ser resuelto localmente.

Cualquier unidad devuelta a Federal Service para recibir servicio, inspección o

reparación deberá estar acompañada de una Autorización para Devolución de Material

(R.M.A. son las siglas en inglés). Esta R.M.A. se puede obtener de su distribuidor local o

de un representante del fabricante.

Se deberá incluir una breve explicación del servicio solicitado o de la naturaleza del

problema.

Dirija todas las comunicaciones y embarques a:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division (División de productos eléctricos)

Service Department (Departamento de servicio)

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-6-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCTIONS DE MONTAGE ET D'ENTRETIEN POUR

LES MODÈLES AMSF-25 ET AMSS-25

MESSAGE DE SÉCURITÉ AUX INSTALLATEURS, UTILISATEURS

ET PERSONNES CHARGÉES DE L'ENTRETIEN

Il est important de suivre toutes les instructions qui accompagnent ce produit. Ce

dispositif doit être installé par un électricien de métier qui connaît parfaitement le code

électrique national et doit suivre les directives du C.N.E. ainsi que les codes locaux en

vigueur.

Le choix de l'emplacement de montage de ce dispositif, de ses commandes et du

passage de câble doit être établi sous la direction de l'ingénieur de l'installation et de

l'ingénieur de la sécurité. En outre, il faut suivre les instructions de sécurité et les

précautions indiquées ci-dessous :

•

Ceci n'est pas un dispositif de sécurité enregistré et il n'est pas censé être

employé comme tel.

Il faut lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d'installer et de

faire fonctionner cet équipement.

Coupez l'électricité avant de connecter ou de faire l'entretien de ce

dispositif.

Tous les haut-parleurs de sécurité efficaces produisent des sons forts qui,

dans certaines situations, peuvent provoquer une surdité permanente. Il

faut prendre les précautions nécessaires comme le port de dispositif de

protection antibruit.

•

Tous les haut-parleurs de sécurité efficaces produisent des sons forts qui,

dans certaines situations, peuvent provoquer une surdité permanente. Ce

dispositif doit être installé suffisamment loin des auditeurs possibles pour

limiter leur exposition tout en assurant le maintien de son efficacité. Le

code OSHA du règlement fédéral 1910.95 sur les normes antibruit donne

des directives qui peuvent être employées pour déterminer les niveaux

admissibles d'exposition au bruit.

•

Une fois que les essais sont terminés, donnez une copie de cette feuille

d'instructions à tous les employés de service.

Établissez une procédure pour vérifier régulièrement l'installation du

haut-parleur, son intégrité et son bon fonctionnement. Tout l'entretien doit

être effectué par un électricien de métier selon les directives de C.N.E. et

les codes locaux en vigueur.

Le non-respect des précautions et instructions de sécurité peut provoquer des

dégâts matériels, des blessures personnelles ou même de mort pour vous ou des tiers.

A. Descr ip tion .

Les modèles AMSF-25 et AMSS-25 de Federal Signal sont des haut-parleurs ronds,

d'usage industriel, de 8 ohms, pour les systèmes de sonorisation ou d'annonce. Ces haut-

parleurs sont conçus pour reproduire toute la gamme des communications parlées. Tous

deux sont construits en aluminium repoussé. Toutes les connexions de câblage des haut-

parleurs sont placées dans un boîtier arrière avec joint étanche aux poussières et à

l'humidité. Toutes les surfaces extérieures sont scellées par de la peinture gris métallique

à revêtement poudré.

-7-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B. Sp écifica tion s.

Caractéristiques de fréquence :

Puissance admissible

Impédance nominale :

800 – 5k Hz

25 watts

8 ohms

AMSF -25

AMSS-25

Largeur :

Hauteur :

18,4 cm (7,25 po)

15,9 cm (6,25 po)

21,3 cm (8,4 po)

10,4 cm (4,1 po)

12,9 cm (5,1 po)

2,7 kg (6 lb)

Profondeur [sans couvercle] : 10,4 cm (4,1 po)

Profondeur [sans couvercle] : 12,7 cm (5 po)

Pois brut :

2,5 kg (5,5 lb)

C. Déba lla ge.

Après le déballage, examinez l'unité et vérifiez qu'il n'y a pas eu de dégâts pendant

le transport. Si l'équipement a été endommagé, n'essayez pas de l'installer ou de le faire

fonctionner. Déposez une réclamation immédiatement auprès du transporteur indiquant

l'étendue des dégâts. Vérifiez attentivement toutes les enveloppes et étiquettes

d'expédition avant de les enlever et de les détruire.

D. Mon ta ge.

ATTENTION

Le choix de l'emplacement de montage de ce dispositif, de ses commandes et du

passage de câble doit être établi sous la direction de l'ingénieur de l'installation

et de l'ingénieur de la sécurité.

Mod èle AMSF -25

Le haut-parleur AMSF-25 est destiné à un montage encastré. Il y a six trous de

montage d'un diamètre d'environ 5,6 mm (0,22 po) dans le rebord extérieur. Voir figure 1.

Installez le haut-parleur derrière un trou de 155,6 mm (6-1/8 po). Il est recommandé de

mettre un peu de silicone RTV sur le rebord extérieur si l'unité est installée dans un

coffret NEMA 4X. Le matériel de montage des haut-parleurs sera fourni par

l'installateur. Le couvercle arrière (voir figure 2) est équipé d'un serre-câble étanche. Ce

serre-câble convient pour des diamètres allant de 4,6 mm (0,18 po) à 7,9 mm (0,31 po).

Fixez bien le couvercle au haut-parleur à l'aide des attaches fournies.

Mod èle AMSS-25

Le haut-parleur AMSS-25 est équipé d'un support de montage à rotule dentelée avec

un écrou de serrage qui permet d'ajuster le haut-parleur sur 90°. Le support de montage

du haut-parleur est destiné à être monté sur une surface relativement plate et rigide. Il y

a trois trous de montage dans la base du support. Voir figure 3. Le matériel de montage

des haut-parleurs sera fourni par l'installateur. Le couvercle arrière (voir figure 2) est

équipé d'un serre-câble étanche. Ce serre-câble convient pour des diamètres allant de

4,6 mm (0,18 po) à 7,9 mm (0,31 po). Fixez bien le couvercle au haut-parleur à l'aide des

attaches fournies.

-8-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MISE EN GARDE

Cette unité est lourde et doit être montée sur une surface rigide qui peut

supporter le poids du haut-parleurs.

E. Con n exion s électr iqu es.

MISE EN GARDE

Ne connectez pas les fils sous tension.

Les fils audio doivent être d'une taille suffisante qui sera déterminée par

l'électricien de métier chargé de l'installation. Connectez le fil audio positif (+)

au terminal avec l'indicateur rouge.

MISE EN GARDE

Ce haut-parleur est un dispositif de 8 ohms et ne doit pas être connecté à un fil

de 25 ou 70 VRMS sans emploi d'un transformateur réducteur de tension. Le

non-respect des précautions et instructions de sécurité peut provoquer des

dégâts matériels, des blessures personnelles ou même de mort pour vous ou des

tiers.

F. En tr etien .

ATTENTION

Tout l'entretien doit être effectué par un électricien de métier selon les

directives de C.N.E. et les codes locaux en vigueur.

Si vous avez des problèmes qui ne peuvent être résolus localement, Federal Signal

fera l'entretien de votre équipement et vous apportera une assistance technique.

Toutes les unités renvoyées à Federal Signal pour entretien, inspection ou

réparation doivent être accompagnées d'une autorisation de renvoi du matériel. Vous

pouvez obtenir cette autorisation auprès de votre distributeur local ou du représentant

du fabricant.

Il faudra donner une brève explication du service demandé ou de la nature de la

panne.

Envoyez toutes communications et expéditions à :

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-9-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODEL AMSF-25

MODELO AMSF-25

MODELE AMSF-25

5.0" (127.0 mm)

4.1" (104.1 mm)

5.0"

(127.0 mm)

Ø 7.25"

(184.0mm)

Ø6.63" (186.4 mm)

Ø.22" (5.6 mm)

290A4364

REAR COVER

CUBIERTA POSTERIOR

COUVERCLE ARRIÈRE

290A4365

-10-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODEL AMSS-25

MODELO AMSS-25

MODELE AMSS-25

5.1" (129.5 mm)

4.1" (104.0 mm)

8.40"

(213.4 mm)

6.25"

(158.8 mm)

4.94" (125.5 mm)

Ø.28" (7.1 mm)

1.75"

(44.5 mm)

2.63"

(66.8 mm)

2.00"

(50.8 mm)

2.60"

(66.0 mm)

290A4366

2561769A

REV. A 1001

Printed in U.S.A.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODEL AM30

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR

MODEL AM30 SPEAKER

MODELO AM30

INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACIÓN Y EL MANTENIMIENTO DEL

PARLANTE MODELO AM30

MODELE AM30

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION ET D’ENTRETIEN OU RÉPARATION

POUR LE HAUT-PARLEUR DE MODÈLE AM30

Address all communications and shipments to:

Dirija todas la correspondencia y envíos a:

Adressez toutes les communiations et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL AM30 SPEAKER

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS, USERS AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

It is important to follow all instructions shipped with this product. This device is to be installed by a

trained electrician who is thoroughly familiar with the National Electrical Code and will follow NEC

Guidelines as well as local codes.

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the routing of the wiring is to

be accomplished under the direction of the facilities engineer and the safety engineer. In addition,

listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:

•

This is not a Listed safety device and is not intended to be used as such.

Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.

Disconnect power before connecting or doing any maintenance on this device.

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause in certain situations,

permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing

protection.

•

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in certain situations,

permanent hearing loss. The device should be installed far enough away from potential listeners to

limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal

Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which may be used regarding permis-

sible noise exposure levels.

•

After testing is complete, provide a copy of this instruction sheet to all operating personnel.

Establish a procedure to routinely check the speaker installation for integrity and proper

operation. Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with NEC

guidelines and local codes.

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage, serious

injury, or death to you or others.

A. Description.

The Federal Signal Model AM30 is a conservatively rated 30-watt constant-directivity paging

projector for use in any public address or paging application.

The driver employs a rugged phenolic diaphragm, 1.5-inch diameter voice coil, and “rim

centered” ferrite magnet structure for long life and durability under extreme operating

conditions.

A 12-inch connecting cable, phased and color coded, is provided for connecting to the AM30.

A nominal 60° horizontal by 40° vertical coverage pattern together with a low-frequency cutoff

of 350 Hz provides excellent articulation in demanding applications.

The AM30 is molded from high-impact ultraviolet inhibiting ASA (acrylic styrene acryloni-

trile). A positive lock super tough nylon swivel base provides maximum mounting flexibility

and ease of installation.

Ideal for both indoor and outdoor applications, these drivers are well suited for any installation

requiring rugged, reliable performance.

B. Model AM30 Specifications.

Frequency Response:

Power Handling:

400-6500Hz ±5 dB

30 watts

Impedance:

Nominal

8 ohms

Minimum, above 500 Hz

6.5 ohms (650Hz)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sound Pressure Level @ 1 meter:

107 dB, 1 watt input averaged, pink noise

band-limited from 500 to 5000Hz

Horizontal Beamwidth:

Vertical Beamwidth:

60° @ 2.0 kHz

40° @ 2.0 kHz

15.9 @ 2.0 kHz

350 Hz

Directivity Factor Rq (Q):

Usable Low-Frequency Limit:

Construction:

High-impact, acrylic styrene acrylonitrile

(ASA) with ultraviolet light inhibiting mesa

tan finish. Positive-lock super tough nylon

swivel base.

Weight:

Shipping

Net

3.8 lbs. (1.7 kg)

3.0 lbs. (1.4 kg)

Housing Dimensions:

Width

Height

Depth

12.1" (30.7 cm)

8.9" (22.6 cm)

12.2" (31.0 cm)

C. Unpacking.

After unpacking the Model AM30, examine it for damage that may have occurred in transit. If

the equipment has been damaged, do not attempt to install or operate it. File a claim immedi-

ately with the carrier stating the extent of the damage. Carefully check all envelopes, shipping

labels and tags before removing or destroying them.

D. Mounting.

CAUTION

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the routing of the wiring is to

be accomplished under the direction of the facilities and the safety engineer.

The speaker is intended to be mounted on any relatively flat and rigid surface. Hardware for

mounting the speaker to the surface is left up to the installer.

Mounting to wall, ceiling, or to electrical boxes is accomplished without the need of adding a

steel plate to the base. Bonding straps may be used for mounting to beams. Mounting holes in

the base should be knocked through as needed.

WARNING

This unit is heavy and should be mounted on a rigid surface capable of supporting the

weight of the speaker.

E. Electrical Connections.

WARNING

Do not connect wires when power is applied.

NOTE

Audio wires should be sized properly by your licensed installation electrician for your service

application. This cable requires a twisted shielded pair with an 18AWG minimum and should

produce no more than 15% signal loss over the length of the cable run.

Connect the positive (+) audio line to the white wire with the red indicator and the negative (-)

audio line to the white wire.

WARNING

This speaker is an 8-ohm device and should not be connected to a 25 VRMS or a 70 VRMS line

without the use of a step-down transformer. Failure to follow these instructions may result

in property damage, serious injury, or death to you or others.

-2-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

F. Service.

CAUTION

Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with NEC guidelines and

local codes.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems

that cannot be handled locally.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair must be accompanied by

a Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A can be obtained from the local Distributor or

Manufacturer’s Representative.

At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction, should

be given.

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-3-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACIÓN Y EL MANTENIMIENTO DEL PARLANTE

MODELO AM30

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA LOS INSTALADORES, USUARIOS Y PERSONAL

DE MANTENIMIENTO

Es importante seguir las instrucciones enviadas con este producto. Este dispositivo debe ser

instalado por un electricista calificado que esté familiarizado con el Código Nacional Eléctrico y siga

las instrucciones así como los códigos locales.

La selección del sitio de montaje del dispositivo, sus controles y la ruta de alambrado, se hará bajo la

dirección del Ingeniero de Facilidades y el Ingeniero de Seguridad. Sin embargo, a continuación se

listan algunas otras instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad que se deben seguir:

• Este no es un dispositivo de seguridad para área peligrosa y no fué creado para tal fin.

• Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de instalar u operar este equipo.

• Desconecte la energía antes de conectar o hacer cualquier mantenimiento a este dispositivo.

• Todos los parlantes de prevención efectivos producen sonidos fuertes, que pueden causar en

ciertas ocasiones, pérdida permanente del oído y se deben tomar las debidas precauciones tales

como usar protectores auditivos.

• Todos los parlantes de prevención efectivos producen sonidos fuertes, que pueden causar pérdida

permanente del oído. El dispositivo debe ser instalado bastante lejos de los oyentes potenciales

como para limitar su exposición. El código OSHA de Regulaciones Federales (EEUU) 1910.95

sobre el ruido, debe ser usado para establecer la permisibidad del nivel de exposición al ruido.

• Después de completar la prueba, entregue una copia de estas instrucciones a todo el personal de

operación.

• Establezca un procedimiento rutinario para probar la integridad y operación apropiada del

altoparlante. Cualquier mantenimiento debe ser realizado por un electricista entrenado siguiendo

las normas NEC y los códigos locales.

El no seguir de todas la instrucciones y precauciones de seguridad, puede provocar daños a la

propiedad, lesiones severas y aún su muerte o la de otros.

A. Descripción.

El Modelo AM30 de Federal Signal es una corneta para llamadas, de direccionalidad constante,

capaz de entregar 30-vatiosal minimo para llamadas o anuncios al público.

La parte activa usa un diafragma fenólico de trabajo pesado, bobina de 1,5" e imán de ferrita de

estructura de “corona centrada” para larga vida y durabilidad bajo condiciones de operación

extremas.

Un cable de 12", polarizado y marcado con colores, se provee para conectar al AM30.

Una cobertura nominal de 60° horizontal por 40° vertical junto con un corte de frecuencia a

350Hz da una excelente articulación en aplicaciones exigentes.

El AM30 es moldeado con ASA (estireno acrílico de acrilonitrilo) de alto impacto con

inhibición de rayos ultravioleta. Una base giratoria super fuerte de bloqueo positivo provee

máxima flexibilidad de montaje y facilidad de instalación.

Estas cornetas son ideales para uso en intemperie e interiores; convenientes para cualquier

aplicación que requiera un desempeño confiable de trabajo pesado.

B. Especificaciones del Modelo AM30.

Respuesta de frecuencia:

Potencia que maneja:

400-6500Hz aprox ±5dB

30vatios

-4-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Impedancia

Nominal

8 Ohm

Mínimo sobre 500 Hz

6,5 Ohm (650 Hz)

Nivel de presión de sonido @ a 1 metro:

107dB, 1 vatio entrada promedio, ruido

rosado limitado a la banda de 500 a

5000Hz

Angulo de cobertura horizontal:

Angulo de cobertura vertical:

Factor de direccionalidad Rq(Q):

Límite de baja frecuencia:

Construcción:

60° @ 2,0kHz

40° @ 2,0kHz

15,9 @ 2,0kHz

350Hz

Estireno acrílico de acrilonitrilo (ASA)

de alto impacto, con inhibición a la luz

ultravioleta, acabado bronce de mesa

y base giratoria de nylon super fuerte de

bloqueo positivo.

Peso

De embarque

Neto

3,8 lbs (1,7kg)

3,0 lbs (1,4 kg)

Dimensiones de la caja

ancho

alto

profundidad

12,1" (30,7 cm)

8,9" (22,6 cm)

12,2" (31,0 cm)

C. Desempaque.

Después de desempacar la unidad AM30, examine cuidadosamente si hay daños de transporte.

Si hubo daños, no intente instalarla u operarla. Haga el reclamo inmediatamente al

transportador estableciendo el monto del daño. Revise con cuidado todas las envolturas, sellos

de embarque y etiquetas antes de removerlas o destruirlas.

D. Montaje.

PREVENCION

La selección del sitio de montaje del dispositivo, sus controles y la ruta de alambrado, se harán bajo

la dirección del Ingeniero de las Facilidades y del Ingeniero de Seguridad.

El parlante se montará en una superficie relativamente rígida y plana. El instalador suministrará

los soportes adecuados para el montaje del parlante en la superficie.

El montaje a pared, techo o cajas eléctricas, se hace sin necesidad de adicionar una placa de

acero a la base. Se pueden usar correas para el montaje a una viga. Se pueden hacer huecos de

montaje en la base, cuando sea necesario.

PRECAUCION

Esta unidad es pesada y debe ser montada en una superficie rígida capaz de soportar

el peso del parlante.

E. Conexiones Eléctricas.

PRECAUCION

No conecte cables cuando haya corriente eléctrica.

NOTA

Los cables de audio deben tener el tamaño correcto seleccionado por un electricista instalador

autorizado para su aplicación de servicio. Este cable requiere un par trenzado blindado con un cable

calibre 18AWG como mínimo y debe producir menos de 15% de pérdida de señal

a lo largo del tramo del cable.

-5-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conecte la línea positiva de audio (+) al cable blanco con marca roja y la línea negativa de

audio (-) al cable blanco.

PRECAUCION

Este parlante es un aparato de 8 Ohm y no se debe conectar a una línea de 25 V RMS o de 70 V

RMS sin el uso de un transformador reductor. La falla en seguir estas instrucciones puede

acarrear daños a la propiedad, heridas serias, o su muerte o la de otros.

F. Servicio.

PREVENCION

Cualquier mantenimiento debe ser hecho por un electricista entrenado que esté familiarizado con

el NEC y siga sus instrucciones y los códigos locales.

Federal Signal le hará servicio a su equipo o proveerá asistencia técnica con cualquiera de los

problemas que no puedan ser manejados localmente.

Cualquier unidad que se devuelva a Federal Signal para servicio, inspección o reparación, debe

acompañarse de una autorización de “material devuelto” (R.M.A.). Esta R.M.A. se puede

obtener con el representante o distribuidor local del fabricante y se adjuntará una breve

explicación de la necesidad del servicio o la naturaleza del mal funcionamiento.

Dirija todas las comunicaciones y envíos a:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-6-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION ET D’ENTRETIEN OU RÉPARATION POUR LE

HAUT-PARLEUR DE MODÈLE AM30

MESSAGE DE SECURITE AUX INSTALLATEURS, UTILISATEURS ET PERSONNEL

D’ENTRETIEN

Il est important de respecter toutes les instructions expédiées avec ce produit. Ce dispositif doit être

installé par des électriciens professionnels qui sont complètement au courant du Code Electrique

National et respecteront les recommandations NEC ainsi que les codes locaux.

Le choix de l’endroit de montage du dispositif, de ses commandes et du passage des câbles doit être

effectué sous la direction de l’ingénieur des services électriques et de l’ingénieur de sécurité. De

plus, sont énumérées ci-dessous quelques autres instructions et précautions de sécurité

importantes que vous devez suivre:

•

Ceci n’est pas un dispositif de sécurité classé et n’est pas destiné à être utilisé comme tel.

Lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d’installer ou d’utiliser ce matériel.

Déconnectez l’alimentation avant de connecter ou de faire de l’entretien sur ce dispositif.

Tous les haut-parleurs effectifs d’avertissement produisent des sons puissants qui peuvent causer

dans certaines situations une perte permanente de l’ouïe. Vous devez prendre des précautions

appropriées comme le port de protection de l’ouïe.

•

Tous les haut-parleurs d’avertissement effectifs produisent des sons forts qui peuvent causer dans

certaines situations la perte définitive de l’ouïe. Le dispositif doit être installé suffisamment loin

des auditeurs potentiels pour limiter leur exposition tout en maintenant son efficacité. Le code

OSHA de Federal Regulations 1910.95 (Norme de bruit) donne des recommandations qui peuvent

être utilisées concernant les niveaux d’exposition au bruit permis.

•

Après fin de l’essai, donnez un exemplaire de cette feuille d’instructions à tout le personnel

utilisateur.

Etablissez une procédure pour vérifier régulièrement le système sonore concernant son

actionnement et son fonctionnement. L’entretien doit être exécuté par un électricien professionnel

conformément aux recommandations NEC et aux codes locaux.

Si on ne respecte pas ces précautions de sécurité, il peut en résulter des dommages aux biens, des

blessures graves ou mortelles pour vous ou d’autres.

A. Description.

Le Modèle AM30 de Federal Signal est un cornet de sonorisation à facteur de directivité

constante de valeur nominale conservative 30 watts pour utilisation dans des applications de

sonorisation ou de recherche par haut-parleur.

Le driver utilise une membrane phénolique solide, une bobine vocale de diamètre 1,5" et une

structure magnétique en ferrite “centrée” pour permettre une longue durée et durabilité dans

des conditions de fonctionnement extrêmes.

Un câble phasé et codé en couleur 12" est prévu pour connecter au AM30.

Un mode nominal de couverture horizontal 60º et vertical 40º ainsi qu’une coupure basse

fréquence à 350Hz donne une articulation excellente pour des applications difficiles.

Le AM30 est moulé en ASA arrêtant les ultraviolets, résistant à de gros chocs (acrylique

styrène acrylonitrile). Une base pivotante en Nylon super-dure à verrouillage positif permet une

souplesse maximale de montage et facilite l’installation.

Idéal pour des applications intérieures et extérieures, ce cornet convient bien à toute application

nécessitant des performances solides et fiables.

B. Specifications du Modele AM30.

Réponse fréquence

400-6500Hz ±5 dB

-7-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Capacité en puissance

30 watts

Impédance:

Nominale

8 ohms

Minimale au-dessus de 500 Hz

6,5 ohms (650 Hz)

Niveau de pression acoustique @ 1 mètre:

107 dB, 1 watt d’entrée en moyenne,

limitation de bande bruit rose de 500

à 5000 Hz

Largeur de faisceau horizontal

Largeur de faisceau vertical

Facteur directif Rq (Q)

60° @ 2,0 kHz

40° @ 2,0 kHz

15,9 @ 2,0 kHz

350Hz

Limite utilisable basse fréquence:

Construction:

ASA (acrylique styrène acrylonitrile) à

résistance élevée aux chocs avec arrêt des

rayons ultraviolets, à finition mesa tan.

Base à pivot Nylon, super solide à

verrouillage positif.

Poids:

Expédition

Net

3,8 lbs (1,7 kg)

3,0 lbs (1,4 kg)

Dimensions du carter:

Largeur

12,1" (30,7 cm)

8,9" (22,6 cm)

12,2" (31,0 cm)

Hauteur

Profondeur

C. Deballage.

Après déballage du Modèle AM30, inspectez-le pour voir s’il a été endommagé pendant le

transport. S’il a été endommagé, faites une déclaration immédiatement auprès du transporteur

en indiquant les dommages. Vérifiez soigneusement toutes les enveloppes, les étiquettes

d’expédition et les étiquettes volantes avant de les retirer ou les détruire.

D. Montage.

ATTENTION

La sélection de l’endroit de montage du dispositif, de ses commandes et du passage des câbles doit

être effectuée sous la direction de l’ingénieur des services électriques et l’ingénieur de sécurité.

Le haut-parleur est destiné à être monté sur une surface relativement plate et rigide. La

quincaillerie pour le montage du haut-parleur sur la surface est sous la responsabilité de

l’installateur.

Le montage sur mur, plafond, ou sur boàtiers électriques est fait sans besoin d’ajouter une

plaque d’acier à la base. Des pattes de fixation peuvent être utilisées pour montage sur des

poutres. Des trous de montage dans la base doivent être chassés selon besoin.

AVERTISSEMENT

Cette unité est lourde et doit être montée sur une surface rigide capable de supporter

le poids du haut-parleur.

E. Connexions Electriques.

AVERTISSEMENT

Ne connectez pas les fils si la tension n’est pas coupée.

NOTE

Les fils audio doivent être choisis par votre électricien d’installation agréé pour votre application de

service. Ce câble exige une paire de fils torsadés et blindés d’un mimum de 18AWG et devrait

produire au plus une perte de signal de 15% sur la longueur du câble.

-8-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connectez la ligne positive audio (+) au fil blanc avec indicateur rouge et la ligne audio

négative (-) au fil bleu.

AVERTISSEMENT

Le haut-parleur est un dispositif de 8 ohms et ne doit pas être connecté à une ligne 25 VRMS ou à 70

VRMS sans utiliser un transformateur abaisseur de tension. Si ces instructions ne sont pas

suivies, il peut en résulter des dommages aux biens, des blessures graves ou mortelles

pour vous ou d’autres.

F. Service.

ATTENTION

Tout entretien doit être exécuté par un électricien entraàné conformément aux recommandations

NEC et aux codes locaux.

L’usine de Federal Signal fera le service de votre matériel et fournira une assistance technique

pour tout problème qui ne puisse être traité localement.

Toutes les unités renvoyées à Federal Signal pour un service, inspection ou réparation doivent

être accompagnées d’une autorisation de retour de matériel. Cette R.M.A. peut être obtenue

auprès du distributeur local ou du représentant du fabricant.

A ce moment, une courte explication du service demandé, ou la nature du mauvais

fonctionnement doit être donnée.

Adressez toutes les communications et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-9-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2561150F

REV. F Printed 6/03

Printed in U.S.A.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

2561188B

REV. B 4/00

Printed in U.S.A.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

FOR

MODELAM302 and AM302GCX AUDIOMASTER® SPEAKER

WARNING

levels. The speaker projector is adjustable and may be reposi-

tioned to obtain desired sound distribution.

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in

property damage, serious injury, or death to you or others.

The AM302GCX is suitable for use in Class I, Groups A, B, C, &

D, Division 2; Class II, Groups F & G, Division 2; and Class III

Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS

Peoples lives depend on your safe installation of our products. It is

important to follow all instructions shipped with the products. This

device is to be installed by a trained electrician who is thoroughly

familiar with the National Electric Code and will follow the NEC

guidelines as well as local codes.

II. SPECIFICATIONS.

Operating Voltage

Power Input (selectable)

Weight (approx.)

Size

25 Vrms or 70 Vrms

7 W, 15 W, and 30 W

7 lb. (3.2kg)

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls

and routing of the wiring is to be accomplished under the direction

of the Facilities Engineer and the Safety Engineer. In addition, listed

below are some other important safety instructions and precautions

you should follow:

14" (356mm) high, 10" (254mm)

wide, 11" (279mm) deep.

Construction

Aluminum enclosure painted

with grey electrostatic powder

• Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating

this equipment.

coating. Amplifier housing

sealed with neoprene rubber

• This unit must be installed by a qualified electrician in accordance

with National and local Electrical Codes, under the direction of

the authority having jurisdiction.

gasket.

Audibility information is shown in table 1.

• Do not connect this unit to the system when power is on.

III. INSTALLATION.

A.Unpacking.

• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may

cause, in certain situations, permanent hearing loss. You should

take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing protection.

After unpacking the speaker, examine it carefully for possible

damage that may have occurred in transit. If equipment has

been damaged, immediately file a claim with the carrier stating

extent of damage. Carefully check all shipping labels and tags

for special instructions before removing or destroying them.

• After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper opera-

tion.

• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may

cause, in certain situations, permanent hearing loss. The device

should be installed far enough away from potential listeners to

limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The

OSHA Code of Federal Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard

provides guidelines which may be used regarding permissible

noise exposure levels.

B. Mounting Arrangements (see figure 1).

CAUTION

To maintain the hazardous location rating of the Model

AM302GCX, do not use the 7/8" knockout (concealed conduit

mounting).

• Show these instructions to your Safety Engineer and then file

them in a safe place and refer to them when maintaining and/or

reinstalling the unit.

The speaker can be mounted on any relatively flat surface.

Conduit connection can be made to 1/2" threaded opening at

bottom of housing or to 7/8" knockout in rear of housing. After

the mounting location and mounting method have been

selected, proceed with the applicable instructions below.

• After installation and completion of initial system test, a program

for periodic testing of this device must be established. Refer to the

authority having jurisdiction for this information.

• Consult the authority having jurisdiction in your area regarding

the proper use and installation of this product.

POWER

TAP

SOUND LEVEL dB(A)

@ 10' on axis

I. GENERAL.

The AudioMaster Model AM302 and AM302GCX are 25 Vrms

and 70 Vrms, indoor/outdoor rated, selectable power output (7 to

30 watts) loudspeakers for use with general utility signaling

systems such as Federal Signal’s SelecTone system. They are

designed to reproduce electronically generated warning tones,

which command rapid recognition, and full range voice communi-

cation. They are suitable for use in areas with high ambient noise

7 watt

15 watt

30 watt

104

109

112

Table 1. Power Tap Settings vx. Sound Output on Models AM302 and

AM302GCX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODEL

AM302

MODEL

AM302GCX

COLLAR

NUT

COLLAR

NUT

5-5/8"

3-1/4"

2-3/4"

2-1/4"

.201" DIA. 4 HOLES

(MOUNTING)

.201" DIA. 2 HOLES

(MOUNTING)

1-13/16"

2-9/16"

INCHES

13/16"

3-3/8"

13/16"

3-3/8"

1/2-14 NPT

10"

15"

11"

254

381

279

5-1/2"

7/8" DIA. CONCEALED CONDUIT KNOCK OUT

MOUNTING(IN REAR OF HOUSING)

290A2627-76B

Figure 1. Models AM302 and AM302GCX Speaker Dimensions.

WARNING

f. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph 4 in

section C, Electrical Connections, and make the necessary

electrical connections.

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if an

accumulation of water, snow, dust, etc. resides in the speaker

projector, severely reducing or preventing operation of this device.

Mount the unit so speaker projector is pointed horizontally

or slightly downward.

2. Model AM302 Concealed Conduit Mounting.

a. Remove and retain the two screws that secure cover to

housing. Remove the cover.

1. Flat Surface Mounting.

b. Remove the 7/8" knockout at rear of housing.

c. Install the conduit connection.

a. Remove and retain the two screws that secure cover to

housing. Remove the cover.

NOTE

WARNING

If installation on an existing electrical box is desired, an optional

Model CC adapter plate is required.

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if any objects

are in front of speaker, severely reducing optimum sound

distribution. For maximum effectiveness, ensure that the

front of the speaker is clear of obstructions.

d. Select the mounting location and place rear of housing

against mounting surface.

e. Using the two (2) mounting holes as a template, scribe

drill position marks on the mounting surface. See figure 1

for mounting hole locations and dimensions.

b. Select the mounting location and place rear of housing

against mounting surface.

c. Using the mounting holes (two (2) inside the Model

AM302’s housing or four (4) in the AM302GCX’s

external mounting bracket) as a template, scribe drill

position marks on the mounting surface. See figure 1 for

mounting hole locations and dimensions.

CAUTION

Before drilling holes in any surface, ensure that both sides of surface

are clear of items that could be damaged.

f. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with #10 screws

appropriate for the type of mounting surface material.

CAUTION

Before drilling holes in any surface, ensure that both sides of surface

are clear of items that could be damaged.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the

projector is mishandled during installation or over time. DO NOT

rotate the projector more than 180 degrees or internal speaker

wiring may be damaged.

d. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with #10 screws

appropriate for the type of mounting surface material.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the

projector is mishandled during installation or over time. DO NOT

rotate the projector more than 180 degrees or internal speaker

wiring may be damaged.

g. Reposition speaker projector if necessary to obtain desired

sound coverage. Loosen collar nut (see figure 1) and move

projector to desired position.

h. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph 4 in

section C, Electrical Connections, and make the necessary

electrical connections.

e. Reposition speaker projector if necessary to obtain desired

sound coverage. Loosen collar nut (see figure 1) and move

projector to desired position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C.Electrical Connections.

DANGER

NOTE

Only three (3) of the five (5) wattage terminals marked on the

terminal block are for use on the AM302 and AM302GCX.

For proper operation, the speaker wire should be connected to one

(1) of these terminals as indicated in figure 3. The remaining two

(2) wattage terminals are not used.

To avoid electrical shock, do not connect wires when

circuits are energized.

WARNING

Audio wires should be sized properly by your licensed installation

electrician for your service application. This cable requires a twisted

shielded pair with an 18AWG minimum and should produce no

more than 15% signal loss over the length of the cable run.

4. Be sure the neoprene rubber cover gasket is properly seated

in the housing groove and reinstall the housing cover.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the housing

is not closed properly. To reduce the possibility of explosion,

the Model AM302GCX’s housing cover must be kept tight

while circuits are energized.

National Electrical Code as well as local codes must be adhered

to in installation of these models. All electrical wiring must be

routed through approved conduit and fittings.

1. See figures 2 and 3. Connect the audio common (-) leads to

the speaker’s common terminal.

IV. TESTING/OPERATING.

WARNING

2. Refer to figures 2 and 3. Connect the audio positive (+) leads

to the 25V or 70V terminal, depending on the external signal

source voltage.

Under certain conditions these devices are capable of producing

sounds loud enough to cause hearing damage. Adequate hearing

protection should be worn if standing within close proximity to

device while testing. Recommendations in the OSHA Sound Level

Standard (29 CFR 1910) should not be exceeded.

3. The AM302 and AM302GCX are factory configured for 30

W operation. If a different wattage terminal is desired,

remove the wire leading to the speaker from the terminal

marked 30 W and connect it to the terminal marked 7 W or

15 W as indicated in figure 3.

A.After installation is complete, be sure to test the system to

verify that each speaker operates satisfactorily. If it is found

that the unit is too loud for its location, a lower wattage tap may

be selected. Carefully remove the housing cover and move the

speaker internal yellow lead to a lower wattage tap (see Figure

3). Reinstall the housing cover and retest.

SPEAKER MODELS

AM302

AM302GCX

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury or death could occur if the housing

is not closed properly. To reduce the possibility of explosion,

the Model AM302GCX’s housing cover must be kept tight while

circuits are energized.

B.After completion of initial system test, establish a program for

periodic testing of this device. Refer to the authority having

jurisdiction for this information.

C.Provide a copy of these instructions for the Safety Engineer,

system operator(s) and maintenance personnel.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS

Even if your warning system is operating properly, it may not be

completely effective. People may not hear or heed your warning

signal. You must recognize this fact and ensure that your warning

signal achieves its intended effect through proper test/training

sequences within your specific application(s).

RED

BLK

RED

BLK

RED

BLK

25 OR 70 VRMS

SPEAKER

SIGNAL SOURCE

290A2627-75C

Figure 2. Typical Installation Wiring.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THESE TWO WATTAGE TERMINALS ARE NOT USED.

NOTE: LETTERS APPEAR ON THIS SIDE OF TERMINAL STRIP. SHOWN

HERE ON MOUNTING BRACKET FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

* * *

SPEAKER INTERNAL YELLOW LEAD TO BE CONNECTED TO 1 OF 3

AVAILABLE WATTAGE TERMINALS INDICATED BY " ".

YEL

POSITIVE (+) LEADS TO 25 OR 70 VOLT TERMINAL, DEPENDING

UPON EXTERNAL SIGNAL SOURCE VOLTAGE.

COMMON (-) LEADS TO COMMON TERMINAL.

290A2627-74

Figure 3. Internal Multi-tap Wiring Set-up.

V. MAINTENANCE.

B.Testing should be periodically performed. Refer to the authority

having jurisdiction for information.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

C.In the event a volume adjustment or other repair is required, be

sure to refer to the Safety Message For Maintenance Personnel

before proceeding.

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result

in property damage, serious injury, or death to you or others.

• Read and understand all instructions before performing mainte-

nance on this unit.

VI. SERVICE.

• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, or ignition of hazardous

atmospheres, do not perform maintenance or service on this unit

when circuits are energized.

WARNING

Unauthorized repair/servicing of the unit may result in degradation

of performance and/or property damage, serious injury, or death to

you or others. If a malfunctioning unit is encountered, do not

attempt any field repair/retrofit of parts.

• Periodic checks should be made to ensure that effectiveness of

this device has not been reduced because speaker has become

clogged with a foreign substance or because objects have been

placed in front of the speaker.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical

assistance with any problems that cannot be handled locally.

• Any maintenance to this unit MUST be performed by a trained

electrician in accordance with NEC guidelines and local codes.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or

repair, must be accompanied by a Return Material Authorization.

This R.M.A. can be obtained from the local Distributor or

Manufacturer’s Representative.

• Never alter this unit in any manner. Safety in hazardous locations

may be jeopardized if additional openings or alterations are made

to Model AM302GCX.

At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the

nature of the malfunction, should be given.

• The nameplates, which contain cautionary or other information of

importance to maintenance personnel, should not be obscured if

exterior of device is painted.

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

A.Periodically check this device to verify that there are no foreign

substances in, or in front of, the speaker which will reduce its

effectiveness.

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODELAM100D

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR

MODELAM100D DRIVER

MODELO AM100D

INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACIÓN Y EL MANTENIMIENTO DEL

EXCITADOR MODELO AM100D

MODÈLE AM100D

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION ET D’ENTRETIEN POUR LE

MODÈLE DE COMMANDE AM100D

Address all communications and shipments to:

Dirija toda la correspondencia y todos los envíos a:

Adressez toutes les communications et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODELAM100D DRIVER

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS, USERS AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

It is important to follow all instructions shipped with this product. This device is to be installed by a

trained electrician who is thoroughly familiar with the National Electrical Code and will follow NEC

Guidelines as well as local codes.

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the routing of the wiring is to

be accomplished under the direction of the facilities engineer and the safety engineer. In addition,

listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:

• This is not a Listed safety device and is not intended to be used as such.

• Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.

• Do not connect this unit to the system while the power is on.

• All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause in certain situations,

permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing

protection.

•

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in certain situations,

permanent hearing loss. The device should be installed far enough away from potential listeners to

limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal

Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which may be used regarding permis-

sible noise exposure levels.

•

After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper operation.

After testing is complete, provide a copy of this instruction sheet to all operating personnel.

Establish a procedure to routinely check the speaker installation for integrity and proper

operation. Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with NEC

guidelines and local codes.

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage, serious

injury, or death to you or others.

A. Description.

The Federal Signal Model AM100D is a heavy-duty, 100-watt, compression driver for use in

high-power public address installations.

The exterior is finished in durable, weatherproof paint and all metal parts have been tropical-

ized for resistance to high-humidity and fungus.

Ideal for both indoor and outdoor applications, these drivers are well suited for any installation

requiring rugged, high-power performance.

B. Model AM100D Specification.

Power Handling:

100 watts

Impedance:

Nominal

8 ohms

Sound Pressure Level @ 1 meter:

Sound Pressure Level @ 10':

Frequency Response:

130 dBa*

120 dBa*

300 - 3000 Hz

Construction:

Rugged die cast housing with weatherproof

finish for outdoor use.

1-3/8"-18 thread, 1/2" long

Mechanical Connection of Driver:

* Pink noise band-limited from 400 to 4000 Hz using AM100H Horn.

-1-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Weight:

Shipping

Net

5.0 lbs.

4.3 lbs.

Dimensions:

Diameter

Height

4.66"

2.82"

Recommended Horn:

AM100H

C. Unpacking.

After unpacking the Model AM100D, examine it for damage that may have occurred in transit.

If the equipment has been damaged, do not attempt to install or operate it. File a claim

immediately with the carrier stating the extent of the damage. Carefully check all envelopes,

shipping labels and tags before removing or destroying them.

D. Installation.

1. Position the supplied washer in the throat of the horn.

2. Screw the driver into the horn.

WARNING

This unit is heavy and should be mounted on a rigid surface capable of supporting the weight

of the speaker.

3. Install the horn/driver assembly in intended location, referring to the instructions provided

with the horn.

4. Route the speaker wiring to the horn/driver assembly.

WARNING

Do not connect wires when power is applied.

5. Connect the speaker wiring to the speaker wire leads.

CAUTION

When connecting multiple speakers, polarity MUST be maintained. Ensure that all red wires are

connected to the same audio output lead, and that all black wires are connected

to the same audio output lead.

E. Service.

CAUTION

Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with

NEC guidelines and local codes.

Do not perform maintenance on this device while the system power is on.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems

that cannot be handled locally.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair must be accompanied by

a Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A can be obtained from the local Distributor or

Manufacturer’s Representative.

At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction,

should be given.

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-2-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACIÓN Y EL MANTENIMIENTO DEL

EXCITADOR MODELO AM100D

MENSAJE DE SEGURIDAD PARA INSTALADORES, USUARIOS Y PERSONAL DE

MANTENIMIENTO

Es importante seguir todas las instrucciones que vienen con este producto. Este dispositivo debe ser instalado

por un electricista capacitado que conozca perfectamente el Código Eléctrico Nacional y siga todas las

Directrices del Código NEC así como los códigos locales.

La selección del lugar de montaje para el dispositivo, sus controles y la distribución del cableado debe realizarse

bajo la dirección del ingeniero de planta y el ingeniero de seguridad. Además, a continuación indicamos

algunas otras instrucciones importantes y precauciones de seguridad que usted debe seguir:

•

Este dispositivo no es un aparato aprobado de seguridad y no debe usarse como tal.

Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de instalar o poner a funcionar este equipo.

No conecte esta unidad al sistema mientras esté recibiendo energía eléctrica.

Todos los altavoces eficaces de alarma producen sonidos fuertes que pueden causar, en ciertas situaciones,

la pérdida permanente de la audición. Usted debe tomar las precauciones apropiadas como, por ejemplo,

usar protección para los oídos.

•

Todos los altavoces eficaces de alarma producen sonidos fuertes que pueden causar, en ciertas situaciones,

la pérdida permanente de la audición. Este dispositivo debe instalarse a suficiente distancia de los posibles

escuchantes para limitar su exposición sin perder por ello su eficacia. El Código de Reglamentos Federales

de la OSHA en su Norma sobre ruidos 1910.95 estipula las directrices que pueden aplicarse respecto a los

niveles admisibles de exposición al ruido.

•

Después de la instalación, pruebe el sistema de sonido para asegurarse de que funcione correctamente.

Después de completar estas pruebas, entregue una copia de este pliego de instrucciones a todo el personal

operativo.

•

Establezca un procedimiento para revisar, como tarea de rutina, la instalación del altavoz para verificar su

integridad y su correcto funcionamiento. Todas las tareas de mantenimiento deben ser realizadas por un

electricista capacitado conforme a las directrices del Código NEC y los códigos locales.

Si no se siguen todas las precauciones e instrucciones de seguridad pueden ocurrir daños materiales, graves

lesiones o la muerte para usted u otras personas.

A. Descripción

El Excitador ModeloAM100D de Federal Signal es un excitador de compresión de 100 W para trabajos

pesados que puede usarse en instalaciones de sistemas de megafonía pública de gran potencia.

El exterior de este dispositivo tiene un acabado con duradera pintura a prueba de intemperie y todas las

piezas metálicas han sido tropicalizadas para lograr una mayor resistencia a condiciones de gran humedad

y al ataque de los hongos.

Estos excitadores son ideales tanto para aplicaciones bajo techo como al aire libre y son muy apropiados

para cualquier instalación que requiera un funcionamiento resistente de gran potencia.

B. Especificaciones del Modelo AM100D

Consumo de energía eléctrica:

100 W

Impedancia:

Capacidad nominal

8 ohmios

Nivel de presión del sonido a 1 metro:

Nivel de presión del sonido a 10 pies ( 3 metros):

Respuesta de frecuencia:

130 dBa*

120 dBa*

300-3000 Hz

Construcción:

Resistente caja fundida al troquel con acabado a

prueba de intemperies para el uso al aire libre.

Conexión mecánica del excitador:

1-3/8 pulg. rosca 18, 1/2 pulg. de largo

* Banda rosada de ruido - Limitada de 400 a 4000 Hz usando una bocina AM100H.

-3-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Peso:

Peso de envío

Peso neto

5.0 libras (2.25 kg)

4.3 libras (1.93 kg)

Dimensiones:

Diámetro

Altura

4.66 pulg. (118 mm)

2.82 pulg. (71 mm)

Bocina recomendada:

AM100H

C. Desembalaje

Después de desembalar el Excitador Modelo AM100D, examínelo para detectar cualquier daño que

pueda haber ocurrido durante su transporte. Si el equipo está dañado, no intente instalarlo ni ponerlo a

funcionar. Presente inmediatamente una reclamación ante el transportista indicando la extensión de los

daños. Revise cuidadosamente todos los sobres, etiquetas de envío y rótulos antes de retirarlos o

destruirlos.

D. Instalación.

1. Coloque la arandela provista en el cuello de la bocina.

2. Enrosque el excitador en la bocina.

ADVERTENCIA

Esta unidad es pesada y debe montarse sobre una superficie

rígida capaz de soportar el peso del altavoz.

3. Instale el conjunto de bocina/excitador en el lugar previsto, consultando las instrucciones que

vienen con la bocina.

4. Distribuya el cableado del altavoz llevándolo al conjunto bocina/excitador.

ADVERTENCIA

No conecte los cables mientras el sistema esté recibiendo energía eléctrica.

5. Conecte el cableado del altavoz a los conductores del altavoz.

CUIDADO

Al conectar múltiples altavoces, se DEBE MANTENER la polaridad. Asegúrese de que todos los cables

rojos se conecten al mismo conductor de salida de audio y que todos los cables negros se conecten al

mismo conductor de salida de audio.

E. Mantenimiento

CUIDADO

Todas las tareas de mantenimiento deben ser realizadas por un electricista capacitado

conforme a las directrices del Código NEC y los códigos locales.

No realice trabajos de mantenimiento en este dispositivo mientras el sistema esté recibiendo energía

eléctrica.

Federal Signal reparará su equipo o le prestará asistencia técnica con cualquier problema que no pueda

corregirse localmente.

Todas las unidades devueltas a Federal Signal para su mantenimiento, inspección o reparación deben

venir acompañadas de una Autorización de Devolución de Materiales. (RMA, por sus siglas en inglés).

Esta RMA puede obtenerse de su distribuidor local o del representante del fabricante.

En ese momento se le pedirá una breve explicación del servicio solicitado o la naturaleza del desperfecto.

Dirija toda su correspondencia y todos sus envíos a:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products División

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-4-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION ET D’ENTRETIEN POUR

LE MODÈLE DE COMMANDE AMl00D

MESSAGE DE SÉCURITÉ POUR LES INSTALLATEURS, LES UTILISATEURS ET LE

PERSONNEL RESPONSABLE DE L’ENTRETIEN.

Il est important de suivre toutes les instructions expédiées avec ce produit. Ce dispositif doit être installé

par un électricien bien formé qui connaît le Code national de l’électricité (NEC) et qui respecte toutes les

directives du NEC ainsi que les codes locaux.

Le choix de l’emplacement de montage de ce dispositif, ses contrôles et l’acheminement du câblage

doivent se faire sous la direction de l’ingénieur de l’installation et l’ingénieur responsable de la sécurité. En

outre, vous trouverez ci-après une liste de certaines instructions et précautions de sécurité importantes à

suivre :

•

Ceci n’est pas un dispositif de sécurité homologué et n’est donc pas prévu à cet effet en termes

d’utilisation.

•

Lisez et comprenez toutes les instructions avant d’installer ou de faire fonctionner cet équipement.

Ne connectez pas l’appareil au système si le courant n’est pas coupé.

Tous les haut-parleurs d’avertissement efficaces produisent des sons forts qui peuvent causer, dans

certains cas, des pertes auditives permanentes. Vous devriez prendre les précautions appropriées comme

par exemple le port de protection auditive.

•

Tous les haut-parleurs d’avertissement efficaces produisent des sons forts qui peuvent causer, dans

certains cas, des pertes auditives permanentes. L’appareil doit être installé assez loin des auditeurs que

possible pour limiter leur exposition tout en conservant son efficacité. La norme de bruit 1910.95 des

règlements du code fédéral de la OSHA (Code of Federal Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard) offre

des directives à utiliser pour les niveaux d’exposition au bruit admissible.

•

Après l’installation, testez le système sonore pour vous assurer de son bon fonctionnement.

Après le test, fournissez une copie de ce feuillet d’instructions à tout le personnel d’opération.

Établissez une procédure de vérification de routine de l’installation du haut-parleur pour vérifier son

intégrité et son bon fonctionnement. Tout entretien doit être effectué par un électricien formé

conformément aux codes locaux et aux directives du code national de l’électricité.

Le non-respect de toutes les précautions de sécurité et instructions peut mener à des dommages à la

propriété, des blessures graves ou la mort pour vous ou pour d’autres.

A. Description.

Le modèleAMl00D de Federal Signal est une commande à compression à usage industriel de 100 watts,

que l’on peut utiliser dans des installations de diffusion publique à haute puissance.

L’extérieur est fini d’une peinture durable à l’épreuve des intempéries et toutes les pièces métalliques

ont été climatisées pour les tropiques afin d’assurer une résistance à un haut degré d’humidité et aux

champignons.

Modèle idéal pour les applications à l’intérieur et à l’extérieur, ces commandes conviennent

particulièrement pour toute installation exigeant une performance robuste et à haute puissance.

B. Spécifications du modèle AMl00D.

Puissance admissible :

100 watts

Impédance :

Nominale

8 ohms

Niveau de pression acoustique @ 1 mètre :

Niveau de pression acoustique @ 10 pi :

Réponse en fréquence :

130 dBa*

120 dBa*

300 - 3 000 Hz

Construction :

Boîtier robuste matricé au fini à l’épreuve

des intempéries pour une utilisation à l’extérieur.

Connexion mécanique de la commande :

l 3/8 po (3,49 cm) -18 pas, l/2 po (1,27 cm)

de longueur

* Bruit rose à largeur de bande limitée de 400 à 4 000 Hz en utilisant l’avertisseur sonore AMl00H.

-5-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Poids :

Expédition

Net

5,0 lb (2,268 kg).

4,3 lb (2,68 kg)

Dimensions :

Diamètre

Hauteur

Avertisseur sonore recommandé :

4,66 po (11,83 cm)

2,82 po (7,26 cm)

AMl00H

C. Déballage.

Après avoir déballé le modèle AM100D, examinez-le pour tout signe de dommages qui auraient pu

apparaître en transit. Si l’appareil est endommagé, n’essayez pas de l’installer ou de le faire

fonctionner. Déposez immédiatement une réclamation auprès du transporteur indiquant la portée des

dommages. Vérifiez attentivement toutes les enveloppes, les étiquettes d’expédition et les étiquettes

avant de les retirer ou de les détruire.

D. Installation.

1. Positionnez la rondelle fournie dans la gorge de l’avertisseur sonore.

2. Vissez la commande dans l’avertisseur sonore.

AVERTISSEMENT

Cette unité est lourde et devrait être montée sur une surface rigide capable de supporter le poids

du haut-parleur.

3. Installez l’assemblage de l’avertisseur sonore/commande à l’endroit choisi en vous reportant aux

instructions fournies avec l’avertisseur.

4. Acheminez les fils du haut-parleur jusqu’à l’assemblage de l’avertisseur sonore/commande.

AVERTISSEMENT

Ne connectez pas les fils lorsque l’appareil est sous tension.

5. Connectez les fils du haut-parleur aux fils de sortie du haut-parleur.

MISE EN GARDE

Lorsqu’on connecte des haut-parleurs multiples, on DOIT respecter la polarité. Assurez-vous que tous

les fils rouges sont connectés au même fil de sortie audio, et que tous les fils noirs sont

connectés au même fil de sortie audio.

E. Réparation.

MISE EN GARDE

Tout entretien doit être effectué par un électricien formé conformément aux codes locaux et aux

directives du code national de l’électricité.

Ne faites pas l’entretien de cet appareil si le circuit est sous tension.

Federal Signal réparera votre équipement ou fournira une aide technique pour tout problème qui ne

peut être solutionné localement.

Tous les appareils retournés à Federal Signal pour réparation, inspection ou entretien doivent être

accompagnés d’une autorisation de retour du matériel. Cette autorisation s’obtient du distributeur

local ou du représentant du fabricant.

Il faudrait aussi joindre une brève explication du service demandé ou de la nature de la défaillance.

Adressez toutes les communications et les expéditions à :

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-6-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2561754A

REV. A 901

Printed in U.S.A.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODELAM100H

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR

MODELAM100H HORN

MODELO AM100H

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACION Y SERVICIO PARA BOCINA

MODELO AM100H

MODELE AM100H

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION ET DE MAINTENANCE POUR

L’AVERTISSEUR SONORE MODELE AM100H

Address all communications and shipments to:

Dirija todos la correspondencia y envíos a:

Adressez toutes les communiations et expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODELAM100H HORN

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS, USERS AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

It is important to follow all instructions shipped with this product. This device is to be installed by a

trained electrician who is thoroughly familiar with the National Electrical Code and will follow NEC

Guidelines as well as local codes.

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the routing of the wiring is to

be accomplished under the direction of the facilities engineer and the safety engineer. In addition,

listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:

•

This is not a Listed safety device and is not intended to be used as such.

Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.

Do not install this device while the system power is on.

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause in certain situations,

permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing

protection.

•

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in certain situations,

permanent hearing loss. The device should be installed far enough away from potential listeners to

limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal

Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which may be used regarding permis-

sible noise exposure levels.

•

After testing is complete, provide a copy of this instruction sheet to all operating personnel.

Establish a procedure to routinely check the speaker installation for integrity and proper

operation. Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with NEC

guidelines and local codes.

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage, serious

injury, or death to you or others.

A. Description.

The Federal Signal Model AM100H is a wide-angle horn for use in public address, paging, and

voice warning systems.

The AM100H is constructed from a Moplen polymer with a self-colored grey finish. A

positive-lock “U” mounting bracket is provided for maximum mounting flexibility and ease of

installation.

B. Model AM100H Specifications.

Cut-off Frequency:

Construction:

300Hz

The horn is molded in grey Moplen

Mechanical Connection of Driver:

date

Threaded metal throat insert to accommo-

a screw-in driver with a throat opening of

0.7-inch to 1.0-inch diameter and a standard

1-3/8" thread

Weight:

Shipping

Net

6 lbs.

4 lbs. 10 oz.

Housing Dimensions:

Width

19.56"

Height

11.50"

Depth

22.31"

Recommended Driver:

AM100D

-1-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C. Unpacking.

After unpacking the Model AM100H, examine it for damage that may have occurred in transit.

If the equipment has been damaged, do not attempt to install or operate it. File a claim

immediately with the carrier stating the extent of the damage. Carefully check all envelopes,

shipping labels and tags before removing or destroying them.

D. Mounting.

CAUTION

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and the routing of the wiring is to

be accomplished under the direction of the facilities and the safety engineer.

The speaker is intended to be mounted on any relatively flat and rigid surface. Hardware for

mounting the speaker to the surface is left up to the installer.

WARNING

This unit is heavy and should be mounted on a rigid surface capable of supporting the weight

of the speaker.

NOTE

Position the supplied washer in the throat of the horn before installing the driver

E. Electrical Connections.

Refer to the instructions packed with the compression driver (AM100D recommended).

F. Service.

CAUTION

Any maintenance must be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with NEC guidelines and

local codes.

Do not perform maintenance on this device while the system power is on.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems

that cannot be handled locally.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair must be accompanied by

a Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A can be obtained from the local Distributor or

Manufacturer’s Representative.

At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction,

should be given.

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-2-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACION Y SERVICIO PARA BOCINA MODELO AM100H

MENSAJE SOBRE SEGURIDAD PARA INSTALADORES, USUARIOS Y PERSONAL

DE MANTENIMIENTO

Es importante seguir todas las instrucciones enviadas con los productos. Este dispositivo ha de ser instalado

por un electricista capacitado que conozca plenamente las Normas para Instalaciones Eléctricas de los

EE.UU. y siga las Directrices de las Normas para Instalaciones Eléctricas de los EE.UU. como así también

las normas locales.

La selección del lugar de montaje para el dispositivo, sus mandos y el recorrido de los cables han de ser

realizados bajo la dirección del Ingeniero de Servicios y el Ingeniero de Seguridad. Además, a continuación

se enumeran otras instrucciones importantes de seguridad y precauciones que debería tomar:

•

Éste no es un dispositivo enumerado de seguridad y no está diseñado para su uso como tal.

Lea y entienda todas las instrucciones antes de instalar o accionar este equipo.

No instale este dispositivo mientras el sistema esté recibiendo energía eléctrica.

Todos los altavoces de aviso efectivos producen sonidos fuertes que, en ciertas situaciones, pueden

causar la pérdida permanente de la audición. Debería tomar precauciones apropiadas tales como llevar

protección auditiva.

•

Todos los altavoces de aviso efectivos producen sonidos fuertes que, en ciertas situaciones, pueden

causar la pérdida permanente de la audición. El dispositivo debería ser instalado lo suficientemente

alejado de posibles oyentes para limitar su exposición mientras se mantiene todavía su efectividad. La

Norma de Ruido 1910.95 del Código OSHA de Reglamentaciones Federales provee directrices que

pueden ser usadas con relación a niveles permisibles de exposición a los ruidos.

•

Después de terminar la comprobación, suministre una copia de esta hoja de instrucciones a todo el

personal operativo.

Establezca un procedimiento para verificar rutinariamente la integridad y el funcionamiento correcto del

altavoz Todo mantenimiento debe ser realizado por un electricista capacitado en conformidad con las

directrices de las Normas para Instalaciones Eléctricas de los EE.UU. y las normas locales.

Si no se siguen todas las precauciones e instrucciones de seguridad, pueden causarse daños a la propiedad,

heridas graves o la muerte suya o de terceros.

A. Descripción.

El Modelo AM100H de Federal Signal es una bocina de gran angular para uso en sistemas de

altavoces, búsqueda de personas y aviso por voz.

El AM100H está construido con un polímero Moplen con un acabado gris autocoloreado. Se provee

un soporte de montaje de trabado eficaz en “U” para máxima flexibilidad de montado y fácil

instalación.

B. Modelo AM100H Especificaciones.

Frecuencia de cierre:

Construcción:

300Hz

La bocina está moldeada en Moplen gris

Conexión mecánica del excitador:

Inserción de boca metálica roscada para

alojar un excitador atornillable con una

abertura de boca de 0,7 pulgadas a 1,0

pulgada de diámetro y una rosca estándar de

1-3/8" pulgadas

Peso:

Envío

6 libras (2,7 Kg)

Neto

4 libras 10 onzas (2,227 Kg)

Dimensiones del alojamiento:

Ancho

Alto

Profundidad

Excitador recomendado:

19,56" (49,68 cm)

11,50" (29,21 cm)

22,31" (56,67 cm)

AM100D

-3-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C. Desembalaje.

Después de desembalar Modelo AM100H, examínelo cuidadosamente por daños posibles que pueden

haber ocurrido en tránsito. Si el equipo ha sido dañado, presente una reclamación inmediatamente

con el transportista indicando el grado de daño. Verifique cuidadosamente todas las etiquetas y

rótulos de envío por instrucciones especiales antes de quitarlos o destruirlos.

D. Montaje.

CUIDADO

La selección del lugar de montaje para el dispositivo, sus mandos y el recorrido de los cables ha de ser

lograda bajo la dirección de los ingenieros de servicios y seguridad.

El altavoz está diseñado para ser montado sobre cualquier superficie relativamente plana y rígida.

Los accesorios para montar el altavoz en la superficie corren por cuenta del instalador.

AVISO

Esta unidad es pesada y debería ser montada sobre una superficie rígida capaz de sustentar el peso del

altavoz.

NOTA

Coloque la arandela provista en el cuello de la bocina antes de instalar el excitador.

E. Conexiones Eléctricas.

Consulte las instrucciones empacadas con el excitador de compresión (se recomienda AM100D).

F. Servicio.

CUIDADO

Todas las tareas de mantenimiento deben ser realizadas por un electricista capacitado

conforme a las directrices del Código NEC y los códigos locales.

No realice trabajos de mantenimiento en este dispositivo mientras el sistema

esté recibiendo energía eléctrica.

Federal Signal reparará su equipo o brindará asesoramiento técnico para cualquier problema que no

pueda ser manejado localmente.

Toda unidad regresada a Federal Signal para servicio, inspección o reparación debe ir acompañada de

una Autorización de Regreso de Material (R.M.A.). Esta R.M.A. puede ser obtenida del Distribuidor

o del Representante local del Fabricante.

En dicho momento, debería proveerse una breve explicación del servicio solicitado, o de la

naturaleza del desperfecto.

Todas las comunicaciones y envíos deberían dirigirse a:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-4-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION ET DE MAINTENANCE POUR L’AVERTISSEUR

SONORE MODELE AM100H

MESSAGE DE SECURITE DESTINE AUX INSTALLATEURS, AUX UTILISATEURS

ET AU PERSONNEL DE MAINTENANCE

Il est important de suivre toutes les instructions expédiées avec les produits. Cet appareil doit être installé

par un électricien qualifié et qui est familier avec le Code Electrique National et qui suit aussi bien les

Directives NEC (Code électrique national) que les codes locaux.

La sélection de l’emplacement de support pour cet appareil, ses commandes et le chemin de câblage doit

être effectuée sous la responsabilité de l’ingénieur des installations et l’ingénieur de la sécurité. En

complément, quelques autres consignes et mesures de sécurité importantes que vous devriez suivre sont

listées ci-dessous:

•

Ce n’est pas un appareil listé de sécurité et ne devra pas être utilisé comme tel.

Lire et comprendre toutes les instructions avant d’installer et de faire fonctionner cet équipement.

N’installez pas cet appareil lorsque le système est sous tension.

Tous les haut-parleurs efficaces produisent des sons importants qui peuvent causer, dans certaines

situations, une perte permanente de l’ouïe. Vous devez prendre les précautions nécessaires, comme par

exemple, porter des protections appropriées.

•

Tous les haut-parleurs efficaces produisent des sons importants qui peuvent causer, dans certaines

situations, une perte permanente de l’ouïe. Cet appareil doit être installé assez loin de personnes

auditrices éventuelles afin de limiter leurs expositions tout en conservant l’efficacité du haut-parleur. Le

Code de Réglementations Fédérales OSHA 1910.95 concernant la Norme de Bruit fournit des directives

qui peuvent être utilisées en ce qui concerne les niveaux permis d’exposition au bruit.

•

Une fois que le test est fini, donner une copie de cette fiche d’instruction à tout le personnel.

Etablir une procédure afin de vérifier de façon routinière l’installation correcte et le bon fonctionnement

du haut-parleur. Toute maintenance devra être exécutée par un électricien qualifié en conformité avec les

directives NEC et les codes locaux.

Le non-respect de toutes les instructions et les consignes de sécurité peut conduire à des dégâts sur les

équipements, de sérieuses blessures ou votre mort ou celle des autres.

A. Description.

Le modèle Federal Signal AM100H est un avertisseur sonore à grand angle utilisé pour les

communications au public, l’appel et les systèmes d’avertissement sonores.

L’AM100H est fabriqué à partir de polymère Mopeln avec un fini de couleur grise. Un support de

montage en forme de U à verrouillage positif est livré avec l’appareil pour assurer une flexibilité de

montage et une installation facile.

B. Specifications du Modele AM100H.

Fréquence de coupure:

300Hz

Construction:

L’avertisseur sonore est moulé en Moplen gris

Connexion mécanique de l’entraînement:

Un insert de gorge en métal fileté pour pouvoir

être utiliser un entraînement vissé avec une

ouverture de gorge de 0,7 pouce à 1 pouce de

diamètre avec un filetage standard de 1-3/8"

Poids:

A l’expédition

Net

6 livres

4 livres 10 onces

Dimension du boîtier:

Largeur:

19,56"

Hauteur:

11,50"

Profondeur:

22,31"

Entraîneur recommandé:

AM100D

-5-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C. Deballage.

Après avoir déballé le Modèle AM100H , l’examiner avec minutie afin de voir s’il a été endommagée

pendant le transport. Si l’équipement a subi des dégâts, remplir une demande de réclamation

immédiatement avec le transporteur rapportant l’étendue des dégâts. Vérifier avec précaution toutes

les enveloppes, les étiquettes et les bandes de marquage d’expédition avant de les ôter ou de les jeter.

D. Montage.

PRECAUTION

La sélection de l’emplacement de support pour cet appareil, ses commandes et le chemin de câblage doit

être effectuée sous la responsabilité de l’ingénieur des installations et l’ingénieur de la sécurité.

Le haut-parleur devra être monté sur une surface relativement plate et rigide. Le choix du matériel

pour le montage du haut-parleur est laissé à l’installateur.

AVERTISSEMENT

Cette unité est lourde et devra être montée sur une surface rigide capable de supporter le poids du haut-

parleur.

REMARQUE

Positionnez la rondelle fournie dans la gorge de l’avertisseur sonore avant d’installer la commande.

E. Connexion Electriques.

Se reporter aux instructions qui sont fournies avec entraînement de compression (AM100D est

recommandée).

F. Service.

MISE EN GARDE

Tout entretien doit être effectué par un électricien formé conformément aux codes locaux et aux directives

du code national de l’électricité.

Ne faites pas l’entretien de cet appareil si le circuit est sous tension.

L’usine Federal assurera le service de votre équipement ou fournira une assistance technique sur tous

les problèmes qui ne peuvent pas être résolus localement.

Toutes les unités renvoyées à Federal Signal pour un service, une inspection ou une réparation

doivent être accompagnées par une Notification de retour de matériel (R.M.A.). Cette R.M.A. peut

être obtenue auprès du distributeur local ou du représentant du fabricant.

Une telle notification devra indiquer clairement une courte description du service requis et donner

toutes les informations importantes concernant la nature du mauvais fonctionnement.

Adresser toutes les communications et les expéditions à:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-6-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2561755A

REV. A 901

Printed in U.S.A.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODEL A15-EL

ELECTRONIC MEGAPHONE

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODEL A15-EL

ELECTRONIC MEGAPHONE

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

A. GENERAL.

•

Caution – Amplified sound or howling may cause damage to a person’s ears.

Do not use this megaphone at or near a person’s ears.

When the megaphone is not in use for a long period of time, remove the

batteries and store separately.

Do not place your megaphone in strong sunlight or near a heater for an

extended period of time.

When cleaning the megaphone body, only use a neutral detergent. Never use

thinner or benzene.

B. UNPACKING.

After unpacking the A15-EL Megaphone, examine it carefully for possible damage

that may have occurred in transit. If it has been damaged, immediately file a claim

with the carrier stating the extent of damage. Carefully check all shipping labels and

tags for special instructions before removing or destroying them.

C. SPECIFICATIONS.

Power Output

Power Consumption

Effective Distance

Power Source

Power Duration

Microphone

Rated: 10W Maximum: 16W

Below 16W (at rated output)

Approx. 825 ft. (250m)

SUM-2 (size C or R-14) dry cell (Alkaline) batteries

Approximately 6 hours

Anti-howling, dynamic type (combined to main body)

7.88 in (200mm)

Horn Diameter

Total Length

13.88 in (340mm)

Weight

Approx. 2.86 lb ; 1.3 kg (without batteries)

D. BATTERY INSERTION.

1. Open the back cover by releasing the cover latch (see figure 1).

2. Place six (6) C-size Alkaline batteries into the unit according to the polarity

indication shown on the inside wall (see figure 1).

E. OPERATION.

WARNING

Your hearing and the hearing of others, close to the electronic megaphone,

could be damaged by loud sounds. This can occur from short exposures to

very loud sounds, or from longer exposures to moderately loud sounds. For

hearing conservation guidance, refer to federal, state, or local recommenda-

tions. OSHA Standard 1910.95 offers guidance on “Permissible Noise

Exposure.”

-1-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. To activate the megaphone press the trigger switch on the grip.

2. When using the megaphone, place your lips as close as possible to the mouth

piece. Adjust the volume control to a range where there is no howling feedback when

in use (see figure 1).

F. SERVICE.

The Federal factory will service your megaphone or provide technical assistance

with any problem that cannot be handled locally.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair must be

accompanied by a Return Material Authorization. This RMA can be obtained from the

local Distributor or Manufacturer’s Representative. At this time a brief explanation of

the service requested, or the nature of the malfunction should be provided. Address all

communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL. 60466-3195

LATCH

POLARITY INDICATION

(INSIDE WALL)

MICROPHONE

MOUTHPIECE

TRANSISTORIZED MEGAPHONE

SHOULDER

TRIGGER

SWITCH

BELT

VOLUME

CONTROL

SPEAKER

GRIP

290A4136

-2-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2561676A

REV. A 10/00

Printed in U.S.A.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUDIOMASTER

EXPLOSION-PROOF-SPEAKERS

MODEL AM15XD1

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR

MODEL AM15XD1

WARNING

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in

property damage, serious injury, or death to you or others.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS

Peoples lives depend on your safe installation of our products. It is important to follow all instruc-

tions shipped with the products. This device is to be installed by a trained electrician who is

thoroughly familiar with the National Electric Code and will follow the NEC guidelines as well as

local codes.

The selection of the mounting location for the device, its controls and routing of the wiring is to be

accomplished under the direction of the Facilities Engineer and the Safety Engineer. In addition,

listed below are some other important safety instructions and precautions you should follow:

•

Read and understand all instructions before installing or operating this equipment.

This unit must be installed by a qualified electrician in accordance with NFPA72, and National

and local Electrical and Fire Codes, under the direction of the authority having jurisdiction.

•

Do not connect this unit to the system when power is on.

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which may cause, in certain situations,

permanent hearing loss. You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing hearing

protection.

•

After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper operation.

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds, which may cause, in certain situations,

permanent hearing loss. The device should be installed far enough away from potential listeners

to limit their exposure while still maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal

Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines which may be used regarding

permissible noise exposure levels.

•

Show these instructions to your Safety Engineer and then file them in a safe place and refer to

them when maintaining and/or reinstalling the unit.

After installation and completion of initial system test, a program for

periodic testing of this device must be established. Refer to the authority having jurisdiction for

this information.

•

Consult the authority having jurisdiction in your area regarding the proper use and installation of

this product.

A. GENERAL.

The AudioMaster Model AM15XD1 is an indoor/outdoor, 15 watt, hazardous location

loudspeaker for use with general signaling systems such as Federal Signal’s FS.COMMS™ or

SelectFone® systems. This model is suitable for use in NEC Class I, Groups B, C, & D;

hazardous locations; and in areas with high ambient noise levels. It is designed to

reproduce electronically generated warning tones, which command rapid recognition, and full

range voice communication. An adjustable mounting bracket is provided to allow positioning

for desired sound coverage.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B. SPECIFICATIONS.

Operating

Voltage

12.8 Vrms Max

Impedence

11 Ohm

Power Input

15 W Max

15 lb. (6.8 kg)

Weight

(approx.)

Size

14.75" (375mm) long, 14.75" (375mm) high,

8.875" (225mm) wide.

Construction

Aluminum enclosure and adjustable

steel mounting bracket painted with

grey enamel.

Approval Agency Listings:

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

Guides UGKZ and UGKZ7

C. INSTALLATION.

1. Unpacking.

After unpacking the speaker, examine it carefully for possible damage that may have

occurred in transit. If equipment has been damaged, immediately file a claim with the carrier

stating the extent of the damage. Carefully check all shipping labels and tags for special

instructions before removing or destroying them.

2. Mounting Arrangements.

The speaker can be mounted on any relatively flat surface. Conduit connection can be made

to the 1/2" threaded opening at bottom of the housing (see figure 1).

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if an accumulation of water, snow, dust,

etc. resides in the speaker projector, severely

reducing or preventing operation of this device. Mount the unit

so speaker projector is pointed horizontally

or slightly downward.

a. Remove the two 1/2-13 hex head bolts, flat washers and lockwashers that secure

mounting bracket to unit.

b. Select mounting location.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if any objects are

in front of speaker, severely reducing optimum sound distribution.

For maximum effectiveness, ensure that the front of

the speaker is clear of obstructions.

c. Using the mounting bracket as a template, scribe drill position marks on the mounting

surface. See figure 1 for mounting hole locations and dimensions.

CAUTION

Before drilling holes in any surface, be sure both sides of surface

are clear of anything that could be damaged.

d. Drill holes at the previously scribed drill position marks to

accommodate 1/2" diameter screws.

-2-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

e. Secure bracket to mounting surface with 1/2" diameter screws

appropriate for the type of mounting surface material.

f. Remove eight 5/16-18 x 1-3/4" hex head bolts, lockwashers and hex nuts that secure

cover to housing and carefully lift off cover.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if the machined sealing surfaces are

damaged on this product. To maintain the

effectiveness of the explosion-proof enclosure, be careful

to avoid damaging the machined sealing

surfaces of cover and housing.

g. Reattach unit to its mounting bracket with two 1/2-13 hex head bolts, flat washers and

lockwashers previously removed. Position speaker so as to obtain desired sound coverage

then tighten these bolts securely.

h. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph d in section 3, Electrical Connec-

tions, and make the necessary connections.

3. Electrical Connections.

DANGER

To avoid electrical shock, do not connect wires when

circuits are energized.

National Electrical Code, as well as local codes, must be followed during installation of

these models. All electrical wiring must be routed through conduit and fittings approved for

explosion-proof installations. The use of metal conduit and fittings is required to provide

grounding of the enclosure.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if suitable barriers are not provided for

explosive gases and other atmospheres. To reduce

the possibility of explosion when this unit is used in Class I, Group B atmospheres, the conduit

MUST have a sealing fitting within

18-inches of the enclosure. Be sure to refer to the National

Electrical Code or the authorities having

jurisdiction in your area.

a. Connect the audio common leads (-) to the speaker’s common terminal (marked (–)) and

audio positive (+) leads to the (+) SIG terminal (see figures 2 and 3).

WARNING

An uninsulated section of a single conductor must NOT be looped around a terminal and used

as two separate connections. NFPA 72 requires

that the wire is severed to provide electrical supervision

of the connection.

b. Carefully reinstall housing cover using eight 5/16-18 x 1-3/4" hex head bolts,

lockwashers and hex nuts that were previously removed. Verify that all housing and

mounting bolts have been securely tightened.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if the housing is not closed properly. To

reduce possibility of explosion, housing cover

must be kept tight (all eight bolts fully tightened)

while circuits are energized.

-3-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D. TESTING/OPERATING.

WARNING

Under certain conditions these devices are capable of producing sounds loud enough to cause

hearing damage. Adequate hearing protection

should be worn if standing within close proximity to device

while testing. Recommendations in the OSHA Sound

Level Standard (29 CFR 1910) should

not be exceeded.

1. After installation is complete, be sure to test the system to verify that each speaker operates

satisfactorily. Reinstall the housing cover.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if the housing is not closed properly. To

reduce possibility of explosion, housing cover

must be kept tight (all eight bolts fully tightened) while

circuits are energized.

2. After completion of initial system test, establish a program for periodic testing of this

device. Refer to NFPA72G, local Fire Codes and the authority having jurisdiction for this

information.

3. Provide a copy of these instructions for the Safety Engineer, system operator(s) and

maintenance personnel.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS

Even if your warning system is operating properly, it may not be

completely effective. People may not hear or heed your warning

signal. You must recognize this fact and ensure that your

warning signal achieves its intended effect through

proper test/training sequences within

your specific application(s).

E. MAINTENANCE.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE

PERSONNEL

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may result in property damage, serious

injury, or death to you or others.

• Read and understand all instructions before performing maintenance

on this unit.

• Do not perform maintenance on this unit when circuits are energized.

• Periodic checks should be made to ensure that effectiveness of this device has not been reduced

because speaker has become clogged with a foreign substance or because objects have been

placed in front of the speaker.

• Any maintenance to this unit MUST be performed by a trained electrician in accordance with

NEC guidelines and local codes.

• Never alter this unit in any manner. Safety in hazardous locations may be jeopardized if additional

openings or alterations are made to this device.

• The nameplates, which contain cautionary or other information of importance to maintenance

personnel, should not be obscured if exterior of device is painted.

-4-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

Effectiveness of explosion-proof enclosure must be

maintained. Use caution to avoid damaging machined surfaces.

1. Periodically check this device to verify that there are no foreign substances in, or in front of,

the speaker which will reduce its effectiveness.

2. Testing should be periodically performed. Refer to NFPA 72G, local Fire Codes and the

authority having jurisdiction for information.

3. In the event a volume adjustment or other repair is required, be sure to refer to the Safety

Message For Maintenance Personnel before

proceeding.

F. Service.

WARNING

Unauthorized repair/servicing of the unit may result in degradation of

performance and/or property damage, serious injury, or death to you

or others. If a malfunctioning unit is encountered, do not attempt

any field repair/retrofit of parts.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with any problems

that cannot be handled locally.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspection, or repair, must be accompanied by

a Return Material Authorization. This R.M.A. can be obtained from the local Distributor or

Manufacturer’s Representative.

At this time a brief explanation of the service requested or the nature of the malfunction,

should be given.

Address all communications and shipments to:

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

-5-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-6-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPEAKER

MODEL

AM15XD1

RED

BLK

SPEAKER

SIGNAL SOURCE

290A3830-02

FIELD COMMON (-) LEADS TO

COMMON TERMINAL.

COM(-)

SIG(+)

FIELD POSITIVE (+) LEADS TO (+)

TERMINAL.

SPEAKER INTERNAL GREEN OR RED

LEAD TO BE CONNECTED TO (SIG)

TERMINAL.

290A3830-03

2561544B

REV. B 400

Printed in U.S.A.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2561545B

REV. B 400

Printed in U.S.A.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

FOR

MODEL AM30XD1 AUDIOMASTER®

EXPLOSION-PROOF SPEAKER

WARNING

A.General.

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions may

result in property damage, serious injury,

The AudioMaster Model AM30XD1 is an indoor/

outdoor hazardous location loudspeaker for use with

general utility signaling systems such as Federal Signal’s

FS.COMMS™ and SelectFone® systems. This model is

suitable for use in NEC Class I, Groups B, C, & D;

hazardous locations; and in areas with high ambient

noise levels. It is designed to reproduce electronically

generated warning tones, which command rapid recogni-

tion, and full range voice communication. An adjustable

mounting bracket is provided to allow positioning for

desired sound coverage.

or death to you or others.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO INSTALLERS

Peoples lives depend on your safe installation of our

products. It is important to follow all instructions shipped

with the products. This device is to be installed by a trained

electrician who is thoroughly familiar with the National

Electric Code and will follow the NEC guidelines as well as

local codes.

The selection of the mounting location for the device,

B.Specifications.

its controls and routing of the wiring is to be accomplished

under the direction of the Facilities Engineer and the Safety

Engineer. In addition, listed below are some other important

safety instructions and precautions you should follow:

Operating

Voltage

Impedence

18.2 Vrms Max

11 Ohm

Power Input

30 W Max

23 lb. (10.5kg)

•

Read and understand all instructions before installing or

operating this equipment.

Weight

(approx.)

•

This unit must be installed by a qualified electrician in

accordance with National and local Electrical Codes,

under the direction of the authority having jurisdiction.

Size

20.75" (527mm) long,

18.56" (471mm) high, 16.375"

(416mm) wide.

•

Do not connect this unit to the system when power is on.

Construction

Aluminum enclosure and adjustable

steel mounting bracket painted with

grey enamel.

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds which

may cause , in certain situations, permanent hearing loss.

You should take appropriate precautions such as wearing

hearing protection.

Approval Agency Listings:

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Guides UGKZ and

UGKZ7

•

After installation, test the sound system to ensure proper

operation.

All effective warning speakers produce loud sounds,

which may cause, in certain situations, permanent hearing

loss. The device should be installed far enough away from

potential listeners to limit their exposure while still

maintaining its effectiveness. The OSHA Code of Federal

Regulations 1910.95 Noise Standard provides guidelines

which may be used regarding permissible noise exposure

levels.

C.Installation.

1. Unpacking.

After unpacking the speaker, examine it carefully for

possible damage that may have occurred in transit.

If equipment has been damaged, immediately file a

claim with the carrier stating the extent of the damage.

Carefully check all shipping labels and tags for special

instructions before removing or destroying them.

•

Show these instructions to your Safety Engineer and then

file them in a safe place and refer to them when maintain-

ing and/or reinstalling the unit.

After installation and completion of initial system test, a

program for periodic testing of this device must be

established. Refer to the authority having jurisdiction for

this information.

2. Mounting Arrangements.

The speaker can be mounted on any relatively flat

surface. Conduit connection can be made to the 1/2"

threaded opening at bottom of the housing (see figure

1).

•

Consult the authority having jurisdiction in your area

regarding the proper use and installation of this product.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if an

accumulation of water, snow, dust, etc. resides in the speaker

projector, severely reducing or preventing operation of this

device. Mount the unit so speaker projector is pointed

horizontally or slightly downward.

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if the

machined sealing surfaces are damaged on this product. To

maintain the effectiveness of the explosion-proof enclosure,

be careful to avoid damaging the machined sealing

surfaces of cover and housing.

a. Remove the two 1/2-13 hex head bolts, flat washers

and lockwashers that secure mounting bracket to

unit.

g. Reattach unit to its mounting bracket with two 1/2-

13 hex head bolts, flat washers and lockwashers

previously removed. Position speaker so as to obtain

desired sound coverage then tighten these bolts

securely.

b. Select mounting location.

WARNING

h. Before reinstalling the housing cover, read paragraph

d in section 3, Electrical Connections, and make the

necessary connections.

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if any

objects are in front of speaker, severely reducing optimum

sound distribution. For maximum effectiveness, ensure that

the front of the speaker is clear of obstructions.

3. Electrical Connections.

DANGER

c. Using the mounting bracket as a template, scribe

drill position marks on the mounting surface. See

figure 1 for mounting hole locations and dimensions.

To avoid electrical shock, do not connect wires when

circuits are energized.

CAUTION

National Electrical Code, as well as local codes, must

be followed during installation of these models. All

electrical wiring must be routed through conduit and

fittings approved for explosion-proof installations.

The use of metal conduit and fittings is required to

provide grounding of the enclosure.

Before drilling holes in any surface, be sure both sides of

surface are clear of anything that could be damaged.

d. Drill holes at the previously scribed drill position

marks to accommodate 1/2" diameter screws.

e. Secure bracket to mounting surface with 1/2"

diameter screws appropriate for the type of

mounting surface material.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if

suitable barriers are not provided for explosive gases and

other atmospheres. To reduce the possibility of explosion

when this unit is used in Class I, Group B atmospheres, the

conduit MUST have a sealing fitting within 18-inches of the

enclosure. Be sure to refer to the National Electrical Code

or the authorities having jurisdiction in your area.

f. Remove eight 5/16-18 x 1-3/4" hex head bolts,

lockwashers and hex nuts that secure cover to

housing and carefully lift off cover.

PIPE

THREAD

DIA.

3 HOLES

20.75 in.

52.7 cm.

18.56 in.

47.1 cm.

8.312 in.

21.1 cm.

0.500 in. 16.375 in. 8.875 in.

12 mm. 41.6 cm. 22.5 cm.

4.500 in.

11.4 cm.

2.500 in.

6.35 cm.

0.531 in.

13 mm.

290A3831-01

Figure 1. Model AM302X Speaker Dimensions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

a. Connect the audio common leads (-) to the speaker’s

common terminal (marked COM). Refer to figures 2

and 3.

2. After completion of initial system test, establish a

program for periodic testing of this device. Refer to the

authority having jurisdiction for this information.

b. Connect the audio positive (+) leads to the + (SIG)

terminal.

3. Provide a copy of these instructions for the Safety

Engineer, system operator(s) and maintenance person-

nel.

c. Carefully reinstall housing cover using eight 5/16-18

x 1-3/4" hex head bolts, lockwashers and hex nuts

that were previously removed. Verify that all housing

and mounting bolts have been securely tightened.

SAFETY MESSAGE TO OPERATORS

Even if your warning system is operating properly, it may not

be completely effective. People may not hear or heed your

warning signal. You must recognize this fact and ensure that

your warning signal achieves its intended effect through

proper test/training sequences within your specific

application(s).

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if the

housing is not closed properly. To reduce possibility of

explosion, housing cover must be kept tight (all eight

bolts fully tightened) while circuits are energized.

E.Maintenance.

WARNING

SAFETY MESSAGE TO MAINTENANCE

PERSONNEL

Audio wires should be sized properly by your licensed

installation electrician for your service application. This cable

requires a twisted shielded pair with an 18AWG mimum and

should produce no more than 15% signal loss over the

length of the cable run.

Failure to follow all safety precautions and instructions

may result in property damage, serious injury, or death to

you or others.

• Read and understand all instructions before performing

maintenance on this unit.

D.Testing/Operating.

WARNING

• Do not perform maintenance on this unit when circuits are

energized.

Under certain conditions these devices are capable of

producing sounds loud enough to cause hearing damage.

Adequate hearing protection should be worn if standing

within close proximity to device while testing. Recommenda-

tions in the OSHA Sound Level Standard

• Periodic checks should be made to ensure that effectiveness

of this device has not been reduced because speaker has

become clogged with a foreign substance or because

objects have been placed in front of the speaker.

(29 CFR 1910) should not be exceeded.

• Any maintenance to this unit MUST be performed by a

trained electrician in accordance with NEC guidelines and

local codes.

1. After installation is complete, be sure to test the system

to verify that each speaker operates satisfactorily. If it

is found that the unit is too loud for its location, a

lower wattage tap may be selected. Carefully remove

the housing cover and move the speaker internal green

or red lead to a lower wattage tap (see figure 3).

Reinstall the housing cover and retest.

• Never alter this unit in any manner. Safety in hazardous

locations may be jeopardized if additional openings or

alterations are made to this device.

• The nameplates, which contain cautionary or other infor-

mation of importance to maintenance personnel, should not

be obscured if exterior of device is painted.

WARNING

Property damage, serious injury, or death could occur if the

housing is not closed properly. To reduce possibility of

explosion, housing cover must be kept tight (all eight bolts

fully tightened) while circuits are energized.

WARNING

Effectiveness of explosion-proof enclosure must be

maintained. Use caution to avoid damaging machined

surfaces.

SPEAKER

MODEL

AM30XD1

FIELD COMMON (-) LEADS TO

COMMON TERMINAL.

COM(-)

SIG(+)

FIELD POSITIVE (+) LEADS TO (+)

TERMINAL.

SPEAKER INTERNAL GREEN OR RED

LEAD TO BE CONNECTED TO (SIG)

TERMINAL.

RED

BLK

SPEAKER

SIGNAL SOURCE

290A3831-02

290A3831-03

Figure 2. Typical Installation Wiring.

Figure 3. Internal Multi-tap Wiring Set-up.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Periodically check this device to verify that there are

no foreign substances in, or in front of, the speaker

which will reduce its effectiveness.

Federal Signal will service your equipment or provide

technical assistance with any problems that cannot be

handled locally.

2. Testing should be periodically performed. Refer to the

authority having jurisdiction for information.

Any units returned to Federal Signal for service, inspec-

tion, or repair, must be accompanied by a Return

Material Authorization. This R.M.A. can be obtained

from the local Distributor or Manufacturer’s Representa-

tive.

3. In the event a volume adjustment or other repair is

required, be sure to refer to the Safety Message For

Maintenance Personnel before proceeding.

At this time a brief explanation of the service requested

or the nature of the malfunction, should be given.

F. Service.

WARNING

Address all communications and shipments to:

Unauthorized repair/servicing of the unit may result in

degradation of performance and/or property damage, serious

injury, or death to you or others. If a malfunctioning unit is

encountered, do not attempt any field repair/retrofit of parts.

FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION

Electrical Products Division

Service Department

2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, IL 60466-3195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cornea Systems Computer Monitor CT1503 User Manual
Craftsman Snow Blower 5368852 User Manual
Craftsman Spreader 486243222 User Manual
Crown Audio Stereo Amplifier XLS 602 A User Manual
Duracell Battery Charger PX28L User Manual
Earthquake Sound Tiller ROTOTILLERS User Manual
Freecom Technologies Computer Drive Hard Drive Dock Duplicator User Manual
Garland Convection Oven MST45R User Manual
Garland Range PS 10 26 User Manual
GE Ventilation Hood ZVB36BN User Manual